Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
B16-0266_REV6 approved documents_1515713408.pdf
75 South Frontage Road West, Vail, CO 81657 Office: 970.479.2139 Inspection Line: 970.479.2149 Construction B16-0266 / Revision 006 Issued: 01/11/2018 TOWN OF VAIL Property Information Address: 2211 N FRONTAGE RD W ( 210311415017 ) Unit #: Parcel Number: 210311415017 Legal Description: Subdivision: VAIL DAS SCHONE FIL 3 Block: A Lot: 1 THRU:- Lot: 3, Subdivision: VAIL DAS SCHONE FIL 3 Lot: 1 VAIL DAS SCHONE 1 PT OF TR C VAIL DAS SCHONE 1 BK-0372 PG-0865 DEC 11-15-83 BK-0609 PG-0822 CERT 05-26-93 Contacts Contact Type: Applicant Full Name: Ed Shagen Address: 5519 Lillehammer Lane 101 Park City, UT 84098 Phone: 301-305-1299 Contact Type: Property Owner Full Name: TNREF III BRAVO VAIL LLC WIDEWATERS GROUP INC Address: PO BOX 3 SYRACUSE, NY 13214-0003 Phone: None Contact Type: Owner Representative Full Name: Alain Chevrier Address: Phone: 709-518-7936 Contact Type: Site Superintendent Full Name: Lawrence Paige Address: Phone: 3154458540 Contact Type: Site Superintendent Full Name: Stephen Bossart Address: Phone: 315-445-8540 Contractor Contractor Type: Company: Precision Construction West Inc State License #: Phone: 970-328-0403 Project Information Project Name: Doubletree Hotel 2016 Project Description: REV6 - Record copy of kitchen revisions and Made Market revisions as per owner request Fees Paid Account #: 001-0000.31111.00 - Building Permit Fee Fee Amount:$6,659.95 Account #: 001-0000.31230.00 - Building Permit Fee - Revision Fee Amount:$195.25 Account #: 001-0000.31111.00 - Building Permit Fee - Revision Fee Amount:$195.25 Account #: 001-0000.31123.00 - Building Plan Review Fee Fee Amount:$4,328.97 Account #: 001-0000.31123.00 - Building Plan Review Fee - Revision Fee Amount:$126.91 Account #: 110-0000.31060.00 - Construction Use Tax Fee Fee Amount:$25,560.00 Account #: 110-0000.31060.00 - Construction Use Tax Fee - Revision Fee Amount:$20.00 Account #: 001-0000.31111.00 - Mechanical Permit Fee Fee Amount:$2,000.00 Account #: 001-0000.31123.00 - Mechanical Plan Review Fee Fee Amount:$500.00 Account #: 001-0000.31111.00 - Plumbing Permit Fee Fee Amount:$1,125.00 Account #: 001-0000.31230.00 - Plumbing Permit Fee - Revision Fee Amount:$15.00 Account #: 001-0000.31111.00 - Plumbing Permit Fee - Revision Fee Amount:$15.00 Account #: 001-0000.31123.00 - Plumbing Plan Review Fee Fee Amount:$281.25 Account #: 001-0000.31123.00 - Plumbing Plan Review Fee - Revision Fee Amount:$3.75 Account #: 001-0000.31230.00 - Plumbing Plan Review Fee - Revision Fee Amount:$3.75 Account #: 001-0000.31111.00 - Revision Fee Fee Amount:$1,760.00 Account #: 001-0000.31128.00 - Will Call Fee (Building Scope)Fee Amount:$5.00 Account #: 001-0000.31128.00 - Will Call Fee (Mechanical Scope)Fee Amount:$5.00 Account #: 001-0000.31128.00 - Will Call Fee (Plumbing Scope)Fee Amount:$5.00 Total Paid:$42,805.08 Conditions CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH PERMITS BECOME VOID: If construction is not begun within 6 months from the date permit was issued. If more than 5 months elapses between inspections. If incorrect information is given on the application at the time the permit was issued. Christopher Jarecki - Town of Vail Building Official NOTICE: By issuance of this Permit the applicant agrees to comply with all Titles of the Town of Vail Code and all applicable State and Federal law. Failure to do so will void this Permit and the applicant shall forfeit all applicable fees. Baskervill, Inc. Project: DoubleTree, Vail, CO Conversion Guestrooms and Public Spaces Renovation CCD No.: 09 Revision No.: 13 Project No.: 2.160036.0 Date: December 5, 2017 T001 TITLE SHEET G002 LIFE SAFETY LEGEND & LIFE SAFETY PLAN – 1ST FLOOR LIFE SAFETY PLAN – FIRST FLOOR 6A Revised exit path and distance calculation for kitchen. D111 DEMOLITION PLAN – 1ST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN – FIRST FLOOR 6A Tagged south kitchen door for demolition. A030 DOOR & WINDOW, FRAME AND HARDWARE TYPES & SCHEDULES DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE Added door 151C and added hardware groupings 17 and 18. A111 OVERALL PLAN – 1ST FLOOR OVERALLPLAN – FIRST FLOOR 6A Revised kitchen and Made Market plans. A121 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN – 1ST FLOOR FIRST FLOOR – REFELCTED CEILING PLAN 6A Revised ceiling layout and lighting locations. A401a ENLARGED FLOOR PLAN – LOBBY/LOUNGE/BAR/KITCHEN A401c ENLARGED REFLECTED CEILING PLAN – LOBBY/LOUNGE/BAR ENLARGED REFELCTED CEILING PLAN – LOBBY/LOUNGE/BAR 4A Revised ceiling layout at coffee bar. A401d INTERIOR ELEVATIONS – LOBBY/LOUNGE/BAR ELEVATION – LOBBY 3A Revised elevation at Made Market. A601 MILLWORK – COFFE BAR Page 2 ALL VIEWS Revised millwork in sections, elevations, and plans. A602 MILLWORK – MADE MARKET ALL VIEWS Revised millwork in sections, elevations, and plans. P101 1ST FLOOR - DEMOLITION 1st Floor – Demolition 6A - Clarify demolition and existing conditions, including existing to remain floor sinks. P402 ENLARGED BAR & MADE MARKET PLANS ENLARGED BAR AND MADE MARKET PLAN – DOMESTIC WATER 6A - Routed ½” cw line to new espresso machine location. ENLARGED BAR AND MADE MARKET PLAN – WASTE AND VENT 3A - Added open site drain for espresso machine and routed to new tie-in location. P403 ENLARGED KITCHEN PLANS ENLARGED KITCHEN PLANS (DOMESTIC AND SANITARY) 6A AND 3A - Revised domestic water and sanitary piping to reflect new locations of kitchen equipment and fixtures. M201 FIRST FLOOR DUCTWORK PLAN First Floor Equipment and Ductwork Plan 6A - Rebalanced airflows for RTU-1 (450 CFM/ton) to allow for increased airflow to 105 Made Market to accommodate increased equipment heat loads. Added additional supply diffuser and 6 return grilles. Return grilles are located over heat producing equipment to allow convection to carry heat into plenum. M203 KITCHEN DUCTWORK PLAN 1st Floor Kitchen Plan 4A – Relocated diffusers and ductwork to coordinate with new ceiling layout and hood location. Kitchen Air Balance- Corrected exhaust airflow for actual condensate exhaust hood airflow. E001 LEGEND, SPECS, LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE PARTIAL RISER DIAGRAM 3A Added additional circuit breaker for RTU-A1. Revised conductor and feeder sizes to what is installed and noted insulation type. E131 1st FLOOR PLAN – MECHANICAL POWER 1st FLOOR PLAN – MECHANICAL POWER 6A Revise RTU-A1 feeders and where it is fed from. E406 ENLARGED PLANS – FITNESS, GUEST LAUNDRY, AND MADE MARKET LIGHTING PLAN – FITNESS AND GUEST LAUNDRY 2A Added additional night lighting. LIGHTING PLAN – MADE MARKET 2D Page 3 Revised lighting controls for space. POWER PLAN – MADE MARKET 3D Revised layout to meet Made Market equipment layout. E407 ENLARGED PLANS – DETAILS AND PANELBOARD SCHEDULE ENLARGED KITCHEN LIGHTING PLAN 3A Revised lighting layout. ENLARGED KITCHEN POWER PLAN 6A Revised power layout for kitchen equipment layout. PANEL SCHEDULE ‘K’ Revised loads to reflect values of kitchen equipment. Moved RTU-1A off panel. K100 OVERALL FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT LAYOUT OVERALL FOOD SERVICE - PLAN Revised equipment in kitchen and Made Market. K102 ENLARGED KITCHEN FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PLAN ENLARGED KITCHEN FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PLAN 5A Revised equipment layout and floor finish. K202 ENLARGED KITCHEN PLUMBING ROUGH-IN PLAN ENLARGED KITCHEN ROUGH IN PLAN 5A Revised rough in locations and rough in key. K250 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 6A Revised schedule. K302 ENLARGED KITCHEN ELECTRICAL ROUGH-IN PLAN ENLARGED KITCHEN ROUGH IN PLAN 5A Revised rough in locations and rough in key. K450 & K451 EXHAUST HOOD SHOP DRAWINGS – A&B EXHAUST HOOD SHOP DRAWINGS Added sheets showing hood shop drawings. K550 BAR AND MADE MARKET ELEVATIONS BAR AND MADE MARKET ELEVATIONS 4A Added elevations of equipment at made market and bar. Baskervill, Inc. Project: DoubleTree, Vail, CO Conversion Guestrooms and Public Spaces Renovation CCD No.: 09 Revision No.: 13 Project No.: 2.160036.0 Date: January 5. 2018 T001 TITLE SHEET List of drawings change to reflect CCD-09, Rev. 13, updated drawing list reflecting sheets that were revised. G002 LIFE SAFETY LEGEND & LIFE SAFETY PLAN – 1ST FLOOR Life Safety Plan – First Floor 6A – Turned off non-pertinent layers to make exit path more visible Kitchen Occupancy is noted “gross” M203 KITCHEN DUCTWORK PLAN This sheet was submitted within the M201 PDF file (M201 and M203 were packaged within one PDF), see attached M203 separated out. P403 ENLARGED KITCHEN PLANS Provided additional requested information on the grease interceptor, referenced correctly sheet K202. PROJECT MANUAL FOR WIDEWATERS VAIL HOTEL CONVERSION & RENOVATION CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS | FOR CONSTRUCTION 2211 N FRONTAGE RD. VAIL CO, 81657 This manual includes a master specification document prepared by Baskervill for Baskervill-designed Double Tree by Hilton renovation projects. The information contained herein has not been specifically edited for this project and will contain information that is not applicable to the specific project. All contractors and suppliers are instructed to correlate the specific project scope as indicated on the applicable drawings with the specification requirements stated herein and provide the Work as indicated on the drawings and as specified. If clarification or additional information is required, submit a Request for Information as specified in Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination.” Information contained in this document is confidential and proprietary to Hilton and Baskervill. All information is subject to copyright and other reserved rights. Use of information for purposes other than constructing the project indicated is prohibited. PROJECT NO. 2.160036.0 25 AUGUST 2016 Set No. ______ WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS ATHR BLDG | PERMIT GMP ADD1 7|29 8|25 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT 00 01 70 SEALS PAGE 00 31 26 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION 00 41 10 SCHEDULE OF VALUES DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 SUMMARY 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 35 13.21 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HOSPITALITY PROJECTS 01 35 16 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 42 00 REFERENCES 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 70 00 DECORATIVE METAL DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 63 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 20 23 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY – Guest Rooms 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK – Public Space 06 41 13 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 06 43 00 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 06 61 13 CULTURED MARBLE FABRICATIONS 06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING – FRP Back of House DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 24 19 WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07 84 43 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 12 16 ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 42 29.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 71 11 DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATION) 08 80 00 GLAZING 08 83 00 MIRRORS DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD – includes Textured Finishes 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 33 STONE TILING 09 51 16 WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS – back of house 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 66 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 09 68 16 SHEET CARPETING 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 23 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 22 39.13 FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS – Ray Door 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 28 19.21 TUB AND SHOWER DOOR 10 31 00 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS 10 56 13 METAL STORAGE SHELVING DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 23 13 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT 11 25 13 REGISTRATION EQUIPMENT 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 22 00 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 36 16 METAL COUNTERTOPS 12 36 19 WOOD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 23.13 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 36 40 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.19 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS 12 48 13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 54 13.13 HOSPITALITY FURNITURE INSTALLATION DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 21 23.16 MRL ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS – CAB RENOVATION ONLY DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23.12 BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23.14 CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, & BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 93.11 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC DDC 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 16 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 46 FLEXIBLE DUCTS 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 37 13.13 AIR DIFFUSERS 23 37 13.23 AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES 23 81 26 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 82 39.19 WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 26 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48.16 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 13 FUSES 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES & CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 51 16 FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS NOT USED DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216.13 ASPHALT - EMULSIFIED ASPHALT SLURRY SEAL 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NOT USED END OF SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 DIVISION 0 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEALS PAGE; SECTION 00 01 07 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 2 DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE 1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD A. Architect: 1. Insert name 2. Insert license # 3. Responsible for Divisions 01-49 Sections except where indicated as prepared by other design professionals of record. B. Structural Engineer: 1. Boyd H. Brown. P.E. 2. Insert license # 3. Responsible for Sections: 03 30 00; 04 22 00; 05 12 00; 05 21 00; 05 31 00; 05 40 00; 31 63 16. C. Fire-Protection Engineer: 1. Insert name 2. Insert license # 3. Responsible for Divisions: Division 21 D. Plumbing Engineer: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEALS PAGE; SECTION 00 01 07 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 2 1. Insert name 2. Insert license # 3. Responsible for Divisions: Division 22 E. HVAC Engineer: 1. Insert name 2. Insert license # 3. Responsible for Divisions: Division 23 F. Electrical Engineer: 1. Insert name 2. Insert license # 3. Responsible for Divisions: Division 26 END OF DOCUMENT 000107 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION; SECTION 003126 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 1 DOCUMENT 003126 - EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION 1.1 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents. B. An existing asbestos report for Project, prepared by <Insert agency or firm name>, dated <Insert date of report>, is available for viewing at the office of Owner. C. An existing lead report for Project, prepared by <Insert agency or firm name>, dated <Insert date of report>, is available for viewing at the office of Owner. D. An existing PCB (Polychlorinate Biphenyl) information report for Project, prepared by <Insert agency or firm name>, dated <Insert date of report>, is available for viewing at the office of Owner. E. An existing mold report for Project, prepared by <Insert agency or firm name>, dated <Insert date of report>, is available for viewing at the office of Owner. F. Related Requirements: 1. Document 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions. 2. Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for notification requirements if materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered. END OF DOCUMENT 003126 FORM – Schedule of Values for AIA Contract A101™–2015, Owner / Contractor Stipulated Sum Agreement To: THE WIDEWATERS GROUP 2211 N FRONTAGE RD. VAIL CO, 81657 the undersigned, (Name of firm, partnership or Corporation) hereby proposes to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the: THE WIDEWATERS GROUP; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION in strict accordance with the Project Manual dated 25 AUG 2016 and the Drawings mentioned therein, and including any subsequently issued addenda for consideration of the following: Schedule of Values Project Gross SF DIV DESCRIPTION BUDGET $/SF % of Budget 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 03 CONCRETE 04 MASONRY 05 METALS 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 08 OPENINGS 09 FINISHES 10 SPECIALTIES 11 EQUIPMENT 12 FURNISHINGS 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 22 PLUMBING 23 HEATING VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 26 ELECTRICAL 27 COMMUNICATIONS 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 31 EARTHWORK 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 33 UTILITIES SUBTOTAL Overhead Building Permit Subcontractor Bonding Builder's Risk Ins. General Liability Ins. SUBTOTAL Contingency Fee SUBTOTAL Performance & Payment Bond TOTAL WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 2 OF 2 ALTERNATES: Alternate Bid on Section:____________________: Add-Deduct____________________________________________Dollars ($_____________) Alternate Bid on Section:____________________: Add-Deduct____________________________________________Dollars ($_____________) UNIT PRICES: Should the amount of work required for this project be increased or decreased due to changes in design or conditions at the site, the undersigned agrees that the following unit prices will be the basis for an increase or decrease to the contract amount. The difference between the "add" unit price and the "deduct" unit price for any particular item of work shall not be greater than 15% of the "add" Unit price. # UNIT For Work Added For Work Omitted U-1 Hand Excavation $___per cu. yd. $___per cu. yd. U-2 Machine Excavation $___per cu. yd. $___per cu. yd. U-3 Concrete (foundation) in Place $___per cu. yd. $___per cu. yd. U-4 Concrete (suspension slabs) in Place $___per cu. yd. $___per cu. yd. U-5 Form Work $___per sq. ft. $___per cu. ft. U-6 Reinforcing Steel in Place $___per ton $___per ton Allowance: The following material cost allowances have not been included in the Base Bid and should the following allowance be accepted, the cost shall be added to the Owner's Contract. # Item - Section Cost Description ALW-1 Not Used $_________ ALW-2 Not Used $_________ ALW-3 Not Used $_________ ALW-4 Not Used DIVISION 1 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 11 00 (01110) - SUMMARY OF WORK PAGE 1 OF 4 Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project Description 2. Definitions 3. Quality Assurance 4. Contractor Use of Premises 5. Bidding Classification 6. Owner Furnished Products 7. Owner Provided Work 8. Allowances 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. Work of this Contract comprises the general construction required for renovations an existing Hotel for conversion to a Double Tree by Hilton Hotel, in city and state as indicated on the Project Manual cover. B. The Work includes, but is not limited to architectural, plumbing, and electrical systems. It also includes installation of furniture, fixtures and equipment (FF&E). C. The work of this Project is shown on the Drawings and described in the various Sections of the Specification. D. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. E. The Project consists of the following: 1. Renovation of Public Functions of (A-2) and (B) occupancies with support functions, located in 28,540 SF of Level 1 of Type IIIA structure; and 9,179 SF of exterior Assembly spaces 2. Renovation of Guest Rooms of an R1 Occupancy of 47,888 SF of Type IIIA structure; the structure is a 4-stories of an existing hotel consisting of 117 Guest Rooms with support functions. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to project site, ready for installation. B. Install: Unpack, assemble, set in final position, fasten in place, make final connections, clean, adjust, and leave ready for use. C. Provide: Furnish and install. D. Receive: Accepting a delivery. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 11 00 (01110) - SUMMARY OF WORK PAGE 2 OF 4 Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL E. Final Connections: Complete plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections as required and recommended by manufacturer for optimum operation of equipment. F. Drawings, Use of: Do not scale the Drawings. If the Contractor chooses to calculate measurements by scaling the Drawings, it is at his own risk and is not considered to be an accurate measurement. The Contractor is responsible for the accuracy of measurements, elevations, lines, and grades of the Work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. It is the intent of the Owner and the Project Manual to conform with the AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT OF 2010. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractors shall limit their use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated. 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. 2. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. B. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for protection and safe keeping of products under this Specification. 1.06 BIDDING CLASSIFICATION A. This Project shall be performed under the following Prime Contracts: 1. General Contract 1.07 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, to Contractor. 2. Coordinate scheduling of, and arrange and pay for Product delivery to site. 3. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 4. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner provided shop drawings, product data, and samples. Provide "takeoff" when requested. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 11 00 (01110) - SUMMARY OF WORK PAGE 3 OF 4 Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL 2. Coordinate scheduling, receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage. Notify shipper and Owner of incomplete and damaged shipments. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. C. See listing "Owner Furnished Products/Work to be Provided" in Owner/Contractor Agreement. 1.08 OWNER PROVIDED WORK A. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples if necessary. 2. Coordinate scheduling of the Work. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for shop drawings, product data and samples, if requested by Contractor. 2. Coordinate schedule and provide supervision of the Work as Owner's on-site representative. 3. Provide access, use of utilities, vertical transportation, and trash dumpster. C. See listing "Owner Furnished Products/Work to be Provided" in Owner-Contractor Agreement. 1.09 ALLOWANCES A. Allowances include direct costs only. All costs for overhead, and profit are included in the Base Bid. B. See listing "Owner Furnished Products/Work to be Provided" in Owner/Contractor Agreement. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 11 00 (01110) - SUMMARY OF WORK PAGE 4 OF 4 Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES; SECTION 012500 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES; SECTION 012500 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 5 d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Project Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES; SECTION 012500 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 5 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 20 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES; SECTION 012500 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 5 REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM Note: Use separate form for each material, product or equipment item. Date: _______________ Request No.: __________ Project:___________________________________ Location: __________________________________ Name of material, product or equipment item submitted as substitution: ________________________________________________________________________________ Name of material, product or equipment item specified: ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ Specification Section____________, Article_____________, Paragraph____________ Qualities that differ from specified product or system: ________________________________________________________________________________ Reason for requesting substitution: ________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________ Name of Manufacturer/(Fabricator): _________________________________ Address __________________ ( )__________ City, State and Zip Telephone __________________________________ Name of Vendor/Supplier: __________________________________ Address __________________ ( )____________ City, State and Zip Telephone Substitution affects other materials or systems, such as dimensional revisions, redesign of structure, or modifications to other work: __________No __________Yes; describe requirements: __________________________________________________________ Savings or credit to Contract Amount for accepting substitute: ______________________________________ Written Amount Dollars ($____________________________) Amount in Figures The attached data is furnished herewith for evaluation of the substitution: Product Data _____, Drawings _____, Samples _____, Tests _____, Reports _____ Other Information ____________________________________________________________ The undersigned hereby certifies: 1. The proposed substitution has been fully investigated and is equal or superior to specified product. 2. The same or better warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified material, product or equipment. 3. All changes in the work resulting from the use of this substitution, if approved, will be coordinated and completed in all respects and all costs, including, but not limited to, those for additional services rendered by the Architect are the responsibility of this Contractor at no additional cost to the Contract. ____________________________________ Contractor ____________________________________ Address ____________________________________ City, State and Zip ______________________________ Signed by WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 26 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 26 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 2 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAYMENT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 29 00 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Sub-schedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment. 4. Sub-schedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's Project number. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAYMENT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 29 00 PAGE 2 of 6 d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form, with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Round dollar amounts to whole dollars, with total equal to Contract Sum. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 6. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 7. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate Owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 8. Overhead Costs: Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each line item. 9. Overhead Costs: Show cost of temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as separate line items. 10. Closeout Costs. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling [five] <Insert number> percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 11. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAYMENT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 29 00 PAGE 3 of 6 C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the first of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on- site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAYMENT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 29 00 PAGE 4 of 6 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Sustainable design action plans, including preliminary project materials cost data. 7. Schedule of unit prices. 8. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 9. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 10. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 11. Copies of building permits. 12. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 13. Initial progress report. 14. Report of preconstruction conference. 15. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 16. Performance and payment bonds. 17. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706. 5. AIA Document G706A. 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAYMENT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 29 00 PAGE 5 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAYMENT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 29 00 PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BIM: Building Information Modeling. B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 10 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its own operations with operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 10 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling, and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit. 4. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format. 2. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in PDF format. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 10 1.7 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow five working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 10 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Use software log that is part of web-based Project software. 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within five days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1.8 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's CAD drawings may be available from Architect for Contractor's use during construction. 1. Digital data files may be available for preparing coordination drawings, Shop Drawings, and Project record Drawings. 2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Contract Drawings. ALL DATA FILES MUST BE FIELD VERIFIED BY THE RECIPIENT. 3. Digital Drawing Software Program: Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2015. 4. Contractor or its subcontractors requesting digital data files shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of “Baskervill CADD/Electronic File Transfer to Contractor” Data Licensing Agreement and pay the digital data fee of $100 per sheet requested. 5. The following digital data files may be available for each appropriate discipline: a. Floor plans. b. Reflected ceiling plans. B. Web-Based Project Software: Use Architect's web-based Project software site for purposes of hosting and managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion. 1. Web-based Project software site includes, at a minimum, the following features: a. Compilation of Project data, including Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, architect's consultants, Owner, and other entities involved in Project. Include names of individuals and contact information. b. Access control for each entity for each workflow process, to determine entity's digital rights to create, modify, view, and print documents. c. Document workflow planning, allowing customization of workflow between project entities. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 10 d. Creation, logging, tracking, and notification for Project communications required in other Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, RFIs, submittals, Minor Changes in the Work, Construction Change Directives, and Change Orders. e. Track status of each Project communication in real time, and log time and date when responses are provided. f. Procedures for handling PDFs or similar file formats, allowing markups by each entity. Provide security features to lock markups against changes once submitted. g. Processing and tracking of payment applications. h. Processing and tracking of contract modifications. i. Creating and distributing meeting minutes. j. Document management for Drawings, Specifications, and coordination drawings, including revision control. k. Management of construction progress photographs. l. Mobile device compatibility, including smartphones and tablets. 2. At completion of Project, provide digital archive in format that is readable by common desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect. Provide data in locked format to prevent further changes. 3. Architect's web-based Project software: a. Newforma, Inc. C. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated. 1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 10 working days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 10 d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Use of web-based Project software. h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. i. Procedures for RFIs. j. Procedures for testing and inspecting. k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. l. Distribution of the Contract Documents. m. Submittal procedures. n. Sustainable design requirements. o. Preparation of Record Documents. p. Use of the premises. q. Work restrictions. r. Working hours. s. Owner's occupancy requirements. t. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. u. Procedures for moisture and mold control. v. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. w. Construction waste management and recycling. x. Parking availability. y. Office, work, and storage areas. z. Equipment deliveries and priorities. aa. First aid. bb. Security. cc. Progress cleaning. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of Record Documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Procedures for completing and archiving web-based Project software site data files. d. Submittal of written warranties. e. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation. f. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. g. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. h. Requirements for demonstration and training. i. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. k. Submittal procedures. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 10 l. Coordination of separate contracts. m. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. n. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. o. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. D. Progress and Coordination Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Status of sustainable design documentation. 6) Deliveries. 7) Off-site fabrication. 8) Access. 9) Site use. 10) Temporary facilities and controls. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) Status of RFIs. 16) Status of Proposal Requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 9 of 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION; SECTION 01 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 10 of 10 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 33 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." 1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 33 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal Category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. h. Scheduled date of fabrication. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL FORMATS A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal: 1. When Filing to Newforma, the following will “Auto Infill” Project name. a. Name of Architect. b. Name of Contractor or Name of Construction Manager. c. Category and type of submittal. 2. Date. 3. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and revision number suffix for resubmittals. a. Specification Section Number followed by a dash and then a sequential number (e.g. for Storefront Submittal ~ 08 41 13-01). Resubmittal shall include an revision number suffix (e.g. for Storefront Resubmittal ~ 08 41 13-01-R1). 4. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for each of multiple items. 5. Submittal purpose and description. 6. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal and Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Indication of full or partial submittal. 9. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 10. Other necessary remarks and identification. B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. D. Submittals for Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files, or other format indicated by Project software website. 1. Newforma Project Center 1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 33 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 1. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 10 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 33 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 1.7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples. B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of Sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 33 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record Sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal. G. Certificates: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 33 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated. 2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. 4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. H. Test and Research Reports: 1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 33 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 1.8 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1.9 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with indication in web- based Project software. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval. 1.10 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. 1. Submittals by Web-Based Project Software: Architect will indicate, on Project software website, the appropriate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without action. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 33 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013300 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 35 13.21; SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HOSPITALITY PROJECTS Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL PAGE 1 OF 6 SECTION 01 35 13.21 SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HOSPITALITY PROJECTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. These Special Requirements contain changes and additions to the General Conditions and other Contract Documents. Where any Article or paragraph is modified or voided by these Special Requirements, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. In any case of conflict, these Special Requirements shall prevail. B. Related Documents: 1. Drawings and Articles of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 2. All Contractors shall be governed by all applicable Sections of these Documents with reference to their respective areas of work. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to apprise its Subcontractors and suppliers of these requirements. a. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall review all Sections of the Specifications and all Drawings and are responsible for all work pertaining to their trade regardless of Drawing or Section of Specifications it is written in. 1.02 GENERAL A. The Contractor and each Subcontractor affirmatively represents that they are skilled and experienced in the performance of work as required by this project and in the use and interpretation of Drawings and Specifications such as those included in the Contract Documents; that they have carefully reviewed the Drawings and Specifications of this project; and that their Contract is based solely on these Documents, not relying in any way on any explanation or interpretations - oral or written - from any other source. The Contractor agrees that it shall be conclusively presumed that the Contractor has exercised his aforementioned skill and experience and found the Drawings and Specifications sufficient and free from ambiguities, errors, or omissions for the purpose of determining its Contract for the performance of the work in conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, and all other Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor and each Subcontractor further represents that they have visited the site and correlated their observations of existing conditions with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Each Contractor shall provide sufficient and adequate labor, materials and construction equipment necessary to properly correlate all phases of the work to the end that the approved Progress Schedule can be adhered to and the Substantial Completion Date met. C. Each Contractor is responsible for all necessary development of the work to fulfill the intent of the Contract Documents for a complete and/or functioning system whether totally defined by the Drawings and Specifications or not. D. In no case shall any Contractor proceed with work in uncertainty. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 35 13.21; SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HOSPITALITY PROJECTS Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL PAGE 2 OF 6 1.03 COMMUNICATIONS A. The Contractor shall forward all communications to the Owner through the Architect. B. Request for Information (RFI) and Supplemental Instructions 1. It shall be the Contractor's obligation to check the Contract Documents and to request of the Architect any clarification necessary and in time so as not to delay the progress of the work. 1.04 RELATIONS WITH ADJOINING PROPERTY OWNERS A. To facilitate his work, the Contractor may choose to make necessary arrangements for use and subsequent rehabilitation of the adjoining Owner's property. Such arrangements are solely the Contractor's responsibility. B. If work is required off-site, outside the Contract limit lines, or on property of others, such areas shall be restored by said Contractor to their original condition, or as required by local authorities, immediately following completion of the work. 1.05 ACCESS TO SITE AND BUILDING A. Access and security of the project site are the responsibility of the Contractor and not that of the Owner, the Architect, or the Owner’s Representative. 1. All construction personnel shall protect work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. 2. The existing building shall not be entered for any reason. a. Contractors' personnel will be restricted to the Project site. b. Contractors found in areas without permission will be treated as trespassers. c. Contractors' personnel shall not fraternize with guests. 3. In those areas where work does occur, access and egress shall be as directed by the Owner’s representative, and working areas shall be confined to within a specific area as directed by the Owner’s representative. 1.06 EXISTING BUILDING A. The Owner will occupy the existing building during the life of the project. All work shall be scheduled at such time and in such a manner to minimize interference and inconvenience to the Owner. Contractors shall obtain the approval of the Owner’s Representative before starting any work within the building. 1. Construction work shall not interfere with the Owner’s operations. There will be no compromise on this requirement. B. The Contractors shall, at all times, proceed in a manner to ensure that the Owner's personnel shall have full use of the building, including utilities. The Contractors shall include in their proposals the cost of all premium time required for work necessary to prevent interruption of building services or the disruption of the Owner’s personnel during their working hours. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 35 13.21; SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HOSPITALITY PROJECTS Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL PAGE 3 OF 6 1. Construction operations shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner's representative prior to commencement of the work. 2. Where parts of the Project require interruption of electrical service for rewiring and relighting, the Contractor shall make arrangements with the Owner's representative to establish times at which the work can be done. 3. Extra precautions shall be taken if interruption of service to occupied areas is necessary, including building power or any electrically operated system. 4. In order to ensure that the above requirement is met, the Contractor shall take positive steps to prevent dust, noise, disruption of utilities, and similar hazards resulting from construction work from either interfacing with or damaging the Owner's equipment. 5. The Contractors shall neither use, nor have access to any part of the building, except as specifically required to complete construction work. a. Construction personnel are expected to exhibit conduct befitting the hotel and to show deference to hotel guests and employees. Construction personnel shall dress consistent with their occupational needs and craftsmen status. b. All workmen shall clean their shoes before entering the existing building. c. Access to the hotel by construction personnel shall be through the designated entrance. Construction personnel will be required to sign-in or be checked in at the beginning of each work day and be signed-out or be checked out at the end of each work day. d. Construction personnel will be required to wear identification while on site, which gives their name and the name of their employer. e. Failure to comply with these requirements will first result in a warning, and on the second occurrence, removal of the offending personnel from the property. 6. Entries, corridors, and stairs shall be kept free of dirt, dust, and debris at all times. 7. Protective measures shall be substantial and positive and subject to no element or risk. All protective measures shall be approved by the Owner's representative before they are incorporated into the work. 8. Dust Control and Partitions: a. The Contractor is responsible to completely control dust during the performance of his work, including any and all necessary measures such as dust enclosures, proper ventilation, etc. This also includes dust control during operations on the part of the Contractor in which services are provided by others. This cost is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1) It is imperative that the Owner's furniture and equipment be fully protected from dust and weather at all times, including nights and weekends, during construction operations. The sequence of operations and the protection provided shall be such that the Owner's equipment will remain protected against all contingencies, whether natural or man-made. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 35 13.21; SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HOSPITALITY PROJECTS Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL PAGE 4 OF 6 2) All operations which may cause dust in the present building must be isolated. Provide where necessary by the Contractor as directed by the Owner's representative. 3) All temporary plywood walls shall be fire retardant treated or painted on both sides with fire protective paint. All polyethylene sheets shall be of self- extinguishing type and shall be so identified. 4) Dust screens are only minimum protection required and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that dust and debris are contained and not allowed to interfere with or damage the Owner's personnel and equipment. b. The Contractor shall provide and remove upon completion all required weather and necessary dust-proof partitions, including doors, at locations required to phase the work, and as directed by the Owner’s Representative. 9. All measurements given in the Documents shall be verified at the existing building before any work is executed by the Contractor, and any discrepancy between the Documents and the actual conditions shall be reported immediately to the Owner’s Representative. 10. Any damage to areas outside of the Project Area, resulting from the construction operation or caused by the Contractor's personnel, shall be restored at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Owner’s representative. 1.07 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE A. All Contractors submitting proposals for this work shall first examine the site and all conditions thereon. All proposals shall take into consideration all such conditions as may affect the work under this Contract. 1.08 GRADES, LINES, LEVELS, AND SURVEYS A. Verify all grades, lines, levels, and dimensions as shown on the Drawings, and report any errors or inconsistencies discovered in the above to the Architect before commencing work. Provide and maintain established bench marks in not less than two widely separated places. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. The Contractor shall take measurements in the field to verify or supplement dimensions indicated on Drawings and shall be responsible for accurate fit of specified work. Any discrepancy between the Drawings and the actual conditions shall be reported immediately to the Architect. B. Tolerances: The Contractor shall be responsible to maintain dimensions for spaces requiring close tolerances for such items as equipment or fixtures by "grounding" such locations. Uneven surfaces and joints will not be accepted which prevent the installation of units whose dimensions are shown in the documents. 1.10 USE OF SITE A. Material Delivery and Storage 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to direct all deliveries to the construction site and not the Architect, the Owner’s Representative, or the Owner. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 35 13.21; SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HOSPITALITY PROJECTS Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL PAGE 5 OF 6 B. The Contractor shall exercise control over all trucks and equipment using public roads and the Owner's property to preclude spillage, tracking of dirt or debris thereon. Should spillage occur, that Contractor is held to promptly clean and remove same. 1.11 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain guard lights for all work at all barricades, railings, obstructions in the streets, roads, or sidewalks, parking, and at all trenches or pits as necessary to direct automobile and truck traffic as well as pedestrians. Remove such work when directed after necessity for same ceases. 1. The Contractor is responsible for all required OSHA temporary protection and barricades necessary for the completion of his work. 2. Any temporary fencing and sidewalk barricades required will be provided by the General Contractor. B. The Contractor will be held responsible for all of his work and materials provided for by the Plans and Specifications until the work is completed and accepted. 1. The Contractor shall: a. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to minimize damage. b. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces and on lawn and landscaped areas. c. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. C. Weather Protection 1. The Contractor shall at all times provide protection against weather -- rain, wind, storms, frost, or heat -- so as to maintain his work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage. At the end of the day's work, all work likely to be damaged shall be covered. 2. During cold weather, the Contractor shall protect the work from damage. If low temperatures make it impossible to continue operations safely in spite of cold weather precautions, the Contractor shall cease work. 3. Any work damaged by failure to provide above protection shall be removed and replaced with new work at the Contractor's expense. D. Dust Control and Partitions 1. The Contractor is responsible to completely control dust during the performance of his work, including any and all necessary measures such as dust enclosures, proper ventilation, etc. This also includes dust control during operations on the part of the Contractor in which services are provided by others. This cost is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. The Contractor shall provide and remove upon completion all required weather and necessary dust-proof partitions, including doors, at locations required to phase the work, and as directed by the Architect. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 35 13.21; SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HOSPITALITY PROJECTS Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL PAGE 6 OF 6 E. Noise Control: 1. Contractor shall minimize noise as required. 2. Contractor shall notify the Property 24 hours in advance of any construction activities that will create excessive noise or odors for the purposes of rescheduling Work or providing notification to Hotel Guests and Employees. F. Water Control: 1. The Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain pumps or other equipment necessary to drain his work. Keep excavation pits, trenches, and ditches, including the entire subgrade, free of any water under any circumstances that may arise. 1.12 FIRE REGULATIONS AND EXTINGUISHERS A. The Contractor is responsible for fire extinguishers and fire protection for all work, equipment, office, sheds, etc., as required by OSHA regulations. B. Free access shall be maintained at all times from the street to fire hydrants and to outside connections for standpipes. Fire doors shall be installed and in operation at the earliest possible time. C. Where existing exits occur, they shall be fully maintained at all times and shall be kept free from materials, equipment, or other obstructions. D. Combustible materials shall not be stored in the building. E. The use of wood scaffolding shall be kept to a minimum and entirely eliminated when possible in order to eliminate fire hazards from this source. No part of the building where forms are in place shall be used for the storage of flammable materials of any kind. Temporary structures of combustible material shall be located not less than 30 feet from the building. F. No smoking or use of tobacco in any form shall be permitted within the building or on the roof surfaces. 1.13 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall comply with all laws concerning hazardous materials. Hazardous material shall be disposed in a legal manner. MSDS sheets for hazardous materials shall be filed at the Contractor's job site office and as otherwise required by law. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 35 16 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL PAGE 1 OF 2 SECTION 01 35 16 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Procedural Requirements 2. Rehabilitation and Renovations of Existing Buildings and Related Materials 3. Installation of Products Removed During Demolition Phase. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 2. Section 02 41 19 - Selective Structure Demolition 3. Division 21-49 Sections PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK A. New Materials: As specified in individual Sections. B. Match existing products and work for patching and extending work. C. Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of existing as a standard. Presence of a product, finish, or type of work, requires that patching, extending, or matching shall be performed as necessary to make work complete and consistent with Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that substrate restoration is complete and areas are ready for installation of new work. B. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 01 35 16 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES Copyright 2016 © BASKERVILL PAGE 2 OF 2 D. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. E. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. F. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. G. Apply any manufacturer’s required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion. B. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to specified condition. C. Refinish visible existing substrate surfaces to existing substrates to specified condition for each material with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes. D. Install products as specified in individual Sections. 3.04 TRANSITIONS A. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, make a smooth and even transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division as approved by Architect. 3.05 ADJUSTMENTS A. Where removal results in adjacent surfaces forming a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect’s review. 3.06 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces to remain which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections where visually evident on exterior wall or roof surfaces. B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. 3.07 FINISHES A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Sections. B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 2 of 10 of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed and tested at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. 2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope constructed on-site as part of permanent construction, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes; doors; windows; millwork; casework; specialties; furnishings and equipment; and lighting. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect. 1.4 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 3 of 10 requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups. 1. Include plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. B. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 4 of 10 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. F. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified. G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including Subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality- control tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the Statement of Special Inspections. 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 5 of 10 1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 6 of 10 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 7 of 10 d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups of size indicated. 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project. 5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials. Comply with requirements in "Mockups" Paragraph. 1.11 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspection allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 8 of 10 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform duties of Contractor. E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 9 of 10 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality- control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill Copyright 2016 RTB Engineering, PC QUALITY REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 40 00 PAGE 10 of 10 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill REFERENCES; SECTION 014200 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill REFERENCES; SECTION 014200 PAGE 2 of 8 C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com. 9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill REFERENCES; SECTION 014200 PAGE 3 of 8 33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org. 36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.org. 47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bissc.org. 49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa- international.org. 65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA). 73. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org. 74. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 83. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill REFERENCES; SECTION 014200 PAGE 4 of 8 84. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 86. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 87. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 88. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 89. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 97. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 98. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 99. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 100. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 101. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 102. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org. 103. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 104. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; http://www.iec.ch. 105. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 107. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 108. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 109. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 111. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 114. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). 115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 116. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 117. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 118. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 119. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 120. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 121. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 122. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 123. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 124. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 125. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 126. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 127. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com. 128. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 129. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 133. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill REFERENCES; SECTION 014200 PAGE 5 of 8 134. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 135. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 136. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 137. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 138. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 139. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 140. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 141. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 142. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 143. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 144. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 145. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 146. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 147. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 148. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 149. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 150. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 151. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 152. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 153. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 154. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org. 155. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 156. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 157. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 158. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 159. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 160. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org. 162. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 164. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org. 166. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 167. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 169. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 170. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 171. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 173. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 175. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 176. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 179. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 180. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 181. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 182. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 183. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 184. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 185. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 186. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 187. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill REFERENCES; SECTION 014200 PAGE 6 of 8 188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 189. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 190. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 191. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 192. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 193. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 194. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 195. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 196. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 197. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 198. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 201. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 202. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 203. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org. 204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 205. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org. C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org. 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill REFERENCES; SECTION 014200 PAGE 7 of 8 17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb. 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov. 2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com. 3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal- iaq.org. 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov. 7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development; www.txforestservice.tamu.edu. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill REFERENCES; SECTION 014200 PAGE 8 of 8 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for commencement of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates of each temporary utility. C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content. D. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 10 E. Moisture- and Mold-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage and mold. F. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste-handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1- 5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-Off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1524 mm). D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 10 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Field Offices, General: Owner will provide conditioned interior space for field offices for duration of Project. C. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction. C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 10 1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes and their proper curing or drying. F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust- producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust- containment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter- equipped vacuum equipment. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install WiFi cell phone access equipment and one land-based telephone line(s) for each field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following: 1. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions. 2. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 1.0 Mbps upload and 15 Mbps download speeds at each computer. 3. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application. 3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 10 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Use of Planned Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 3. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Schedule at the end of this Section. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 10 I. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. 1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for that purpose. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday. F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. G. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking specified in other Sections. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 10 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe delivery, handling, storage, installation, and protection provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 1. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. 3. Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work. B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified for installed and stored materials. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum- based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective and require replacing. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 9 of 10 b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove and replace materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS; SECTION 01 50 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 10 of 10 3.8 PROJECT SIGN SCHEDULE A. Project Identification Sign 1. Vinyl Reflective Graphics adhered to 3’-0” x 3’-0” plywood. 2. Graphic: END OF SECTION 015000 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 60 00 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 60 00 PAGE 2 of 6 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the following: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional identification requirements. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 60 00 PAGE 3 of 6 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 60 00 PAGE 4 of 6 C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the Architect, whose determination is final. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: …" 2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: …" 3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: …" WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 60 00 PAGE 5 of 6 4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …" 5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …" 6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …" 7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS; SECTION 01 60 00 PAGE 6 of 6 1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements. 2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested. B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For [and surveyor. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 2 of 10 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. D. Certified Surveys: Submit one PDF copy signed by professional engineer. E. Final Property Survey: Submit one PDF copy showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Conveying systems. k. Electrical wiring systems. l. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 3 of 10 or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 4 of 10 B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 5 of 10 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Final Property Survey: Engage a professional engineer to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 6 of 10 F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work. 1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 7 of 10 G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 8 of 10 B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 9 of 10 H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill EXECUTION; SECTION 01 73 00 PAGE 10 of 10 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 77 00 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 77 00 PAGE 2 of 6 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 77 00 PAGE 3 of 6 unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. 5. Submit final completion photographic documentation. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. Web-based project software upload. Utilize software feature for creating and updating list of incomplete items (punch list). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 77 00 PAGE 4 of 6 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. 1. Submit by uploading to web-based project software site. E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 77 00 PAGE 5 of 6 c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA ACR. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES; SECTION 01 77 00 PAGE 6 of 6 a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA; SECTION 01 78 23 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 2. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. Submit by uploading to web-based project software site. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA; SECTION 01 78 23 PAGE 2 of 6 D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. 1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. 1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA; SECTION 01 78 23 PAGE 3 of 6 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 1.7 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. C. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA; SECTION 01 78 23 PAGE 4 of 6 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification. 1.8 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below. C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA; SECTION 01 78 23 PAGE 5 of 6 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 017823 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA; SECTION 01 78 23 PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS; SECTION 01 78 39 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one set of prints. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. 1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS; SECTION 01 78 39 PAGE 2 of 4 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS; SECTION 01 78 39 PAGE 3 of 4 1.5 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications. 1.6 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. C. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 1.7 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS; SECTION 01 78 39 PAGE 4 of 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION 017839 DIVISION 2 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill SELECTIVE DEMOLITION; SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill SELECTIVE DEMOLITION; SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 2 of 8 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building. C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. E. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill SELECTIVE DEMOLITION; SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 3 of 8 B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. No items noted at time of bid. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous materials that are known to be present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished because of building operations or processes performed there. F. Historic Areas: Demolition and hauling equipment and other materials shall be of sizes that clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary protection, by 12 inches (300 mm) or more. G. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. H. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following: 1. No warranted systems. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill SELECTIVE DEMOLITION; SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 4 of 8 1.11 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. D. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning. E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill SELECTIVE DEMOLITION; SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 5 of 8 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. d. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. e. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill SELECTIVE DEMOLITION; SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 6 of 8 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill SELECTIVE DEMOLITION; SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 7 of 8 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. D. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than as required to connect the new roof and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA- approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Remove: 1. Concrete Paving and Sidewalk: per process listed above. 2. All Interior contents of the existing four story building. 3. Walls as indicated on plan B. Remove and Salvage: 1. Items: Remove and Salvage for reuse at another owner property. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill SELECTIVE DEMOLITION; SECTION 02 41 19 PAGE 8 of 8 C. Remove, Clean and Reinstall: 1. Remove all signage on back of entry room door, clean, store, and reinstall after the door has been refinished or replaced. D. Existing to Remain: 1. None. E. Dismantle: 1. None. END OF SECTION 024119 DIVISION 3 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 24 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; SECTION 03 30 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 033053 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready- mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. Comply with the following sections of ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing." 6. "Lightweight Concrete." B. Comply with ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 24 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; SECTION 03 30 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn. C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as- drawn steel wire into flat sheets. D. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III Only one brand of cement shall be used for all concrete work C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330/C 330M, 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. F. Water: Clean, potable. 2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick; or plastic sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C. B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 24 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; SECTION 03 30 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth or cotton mats. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M). B. Normal-Weight Concrete: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. 4. Slump Limit: 7 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301 (ACI 301M). Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent. C. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m). 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m). 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 24 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; SECTION 03 30 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. 1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 24 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; SECTION 03 30 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for placing concrete. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M). C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. D. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). E. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches (150 mm) high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on the Structural Drawings. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor them into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch (13 mm). 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm). 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, on exterior walk and paving applications. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to smooth- formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-rubbed finish. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 24 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; SECTION 03 30 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. 1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. C. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes unless otherwise indicated. D. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid-applied or direct-to-deck-applied membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. E. Slip-Resistive Broom Finish: Apply a slip-resistive finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 24 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; SECTION 03 30 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. END OF SECTION 033053 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 24 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE; SECTION 03 30 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 DIVISION 5 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Load-bearing framing for boxed stud lintels 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Ceiling joist framing. 4. Soffit framing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Expansion anchors. 2. Power-actuated anchors. 3. Mechanical fasteners. 4. Vertical deflection clips. 5. Horizontal drift deflection clips WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 2 of 10 D. Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." D. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems 2. MBA Building Supplies 3. Nuconsteel, A Nucor Company 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing. B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa). b. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for total loads of the span. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 3 of 10 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C). 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch (13 mm). 5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards: 1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213. D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200. E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180), A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZ150), or GF30 (ZGF90). B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180). 2.4 LOAD-BEARING FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.00451 inch (1.15 mm), 18 Gage. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 4 of 10 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.00451 inch (1.15 mm), 18 Gage. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). D. Steel Single- or Double-L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.00451 inch (1.15 mm), 18 Gage 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). 2.5 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). 3. Section Properties: B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems b. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications. E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 5 of 10 2.6 SOFFIT FRAMING A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.00451 inch (1.15 mm), 18 Gage. 2. Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm), minimum. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on drawings. 2.7 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Web stiffeners. 3. Anchor clips. 4. End clips. 5. Stud kickers and knee braces. 2.8 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel headless bolts, with encased end threaded, and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by mechanically deposition according to ASTM B 695, Class 50. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC- ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 6 of 10 B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims. E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 7 of 10 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire- resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 8 of 10 G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to[ top and] bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 12 inches (305 mm) or 16 inches (406 mm) and As indicated on Drawings. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 3. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking at 96-inch (2440-mm) centers and on centers indicated on Shop Drawings. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 9 of 10 G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall- framing system. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 054000 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING; SECTION 05 40 00 PAGE 10 of 10 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill METAL FABRICATIONS; SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for countertops. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill METAL FABRICATIONS; SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 2 of 8 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill METAL FABRICATIONS; SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 3 of 8 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: As indicated. 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230); 0.0677-inch (1.7-mm) minimum thickness; unfinished. G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. H. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6. I. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1). E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill METAL FABRICATIONS; SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 4 of 8 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. I. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill METAL FABRICATIONS; SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 5 of 8 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150- mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill METAL FABRICATIONS; SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 6 of 8 C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.7 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls. D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in- place concrete. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. 2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates. C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill METAL FABRICATIONS; SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 7 of 8 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. C. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill METAL FABRICATIONS; SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 8 of 8 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions, overhead doors and overhead grilles securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure. 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 055000 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS: SECTION 05 52 13 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipe and tube railings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055112 "Metal Pan Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal pan stairs. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS: SECTION 05 52 13 PAGE 2 of 8 3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height. a. Show method of connecting and finishing members at intersections. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. E. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Greendale Railing Co. b. Wagner, R & B, Inc. c. Wright’s Iron & Steel Works, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS: SECTION 05 52 13 PAGE 3 of 8 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C, material surfaces). 2.3 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage] and that provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. 2.4 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513. B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS: SECTION 05 52 13 PAGE 4 of 8 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. 3. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 3. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1 (A1)] [Group 2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS: SECTION 05 52 13 PAGE 5 of 8 F. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting". G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. I. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Form Changes in Direction as Follows: 1. As detailed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS: SECTION 05 52 13 PAGE 6 of 8 2. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated. J. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush- resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. O. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. D. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves; however, galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS: SECTION 05 52 13 PAGE 7 of 8 1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. 2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. G. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime- coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m). C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS: SECTION 05 52 13 PAGE 8 of 8 B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws. B. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. C. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete. 3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections. B. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 2. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting". D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055213 DIVISION 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 06 10 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood sleepers. 3. Utility shelving. 4. Plywood backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 06 10 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Post-installed anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 06 10 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame- spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark end or back of each piece] [or] [omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency]. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Concealed blocking. 3. Plywood backing panels. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 06 10 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 2. Northern species; NLGA. B. Other Framing: No. 2 grade of any of the following species: 1. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Grounds. 4. Utility shelving. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 2. Northern species; NLGA. C. Utility Shelving: Lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine No. 2 grade; SPIB. D. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 06 10 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Manufacturers: Basis of Design 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. C. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high- strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Gluing Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 06 10 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. F. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. I. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 06 10 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061053 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 06 10 53 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 061063 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 061063 - EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood fences. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: 1. For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. B. Evaluation Reports: For preservative-treated wood products, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content: 1. Boards: 19 percent. 2. Dimension Lumber: 19 percent. 3. Timber. 19 percent. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 061063 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 2.2 LUMBER A. Dimension Lumber: No. 2 grade and[ any of] the following species: 1. Redwood; RIS. B. Boards: Of the following species and grades: 1. Western red cedar, Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.3 POSTS A. Dimension Lumber Posts: No. 2. grade and of the following species: 1. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. B. Timber Posts: Balsam fir, Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (North), eastern hemlock tamarack (North), hem-fir, southern pine, western hemlock, or western hemlock (North); No. 1, NeLMA, NLGA, SPIB, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. Timber Posts: Southern pine; No. 1, SPIB. 2.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. B. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use Category UC4a. 1. Treatment with CCA shall include post-treatment fixation process. C. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium except for timber posts and poles. D. After treatment, redry boards, and dimension lumber to 19 percent maximum moisture content. E. Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark each piece on surface that will not be exposed] [or] [omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency]. F. Application: Treat all wood unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 061063 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate. 1. Use stainless steel or fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 unless otherwise indicated. 2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners. B. Postinstalled Anchors: Stainless-steel, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or Grade A4). 2.6 METAL ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit work to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated. C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Apply copper naphthenate field treatment to comply with AWPA M4, to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. F. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. ICC-ES AC70 for power-driven fasteners. 2. "Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code. 3. "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members" and "Alternate Attachments" in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. END OF SECTION 061063 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY; SECTION 061063 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY; SECTION 062023 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Interior Finish Carpentry for Guest Rooms: 1. Interior trim, including nonfire-rated interior door and sidelight frames. 2. Interior board paneling. 3. Shelving and clothes rods. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical- treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. B. Samples for Verification: 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied finish, with half of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels. 2. For foam plastic moldings, with half of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY; SECTION 062023 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 9 3. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated wood, from ICC-ES. B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Columns: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace columns that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Columns: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY; SECTION 062023 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 9 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4. D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. F. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturers standard finishes. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC1. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 18 percent, respectively. 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 4. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 5. Mark lumber with treatment-quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review. a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. 6. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece. 7. Application: All interior lumber and plywood in contact with or within 18-inches of ground, concrete, or water. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: For applications indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and comply with testing requirements; testing will be conducted by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame- spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY; SECTION 062023 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 9 progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not contain colorants, and provide materials that do not have marks from spacer sticks on exposed face. D. Do not use material that does not comply with requirements for untreated material or is warped or discolored. E. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. 2. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece. F. Application: All interior lumber and plywood on rated walls. 2.4 INTERIOR TRIM A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): 1. Species and Grade: [Red oak] [White maple], Clear; NHLA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 13 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Gluing for Width: Use for lumber trim wider than 6 inches (150 mm). 5. Veneered Material: Use for lumber trim wider than 6 inches (150 mm). 6. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish): 1. Species and Grade: White woods, 2 Common; WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 percent or less. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 5. Optional Material: Primed MDF of same actual dimensions as lumber indicated may be used in lieu of lumber. C. Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): MMPA HWM 4, N-grade wood moldings made to patterns included in MMPA's "HWM/Series Hardwood Moulding Patterns." 1. Species: [Red oak] [White maple]. 2. Kiln-dried softwood or MDF, with exposed surfaces veneered with species indicated, may be used in lieu of solid wood. 3. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 4. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 5. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY; SECTION 062023 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 9 6. Base Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 7. Shoe-Mold Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 8. Casing Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 9. Mull-Casing Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 10. Stop Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 11. Chair-Rail Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. D. PVC-Wrapped Moldings: MMPA WM 2 and made to patterns included in MMPA's "WM/Series Wood Moulding Patterns." 1. Manufacturers: a. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation b. Nickell Moulding Company, Inc. c. Spectrum Products, Inc. d. Zamma Corporation 2. Base Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 3. Shoe-Mold Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 4. Casing Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 5. Mull-Casing Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 6. Stop Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 7. Chair-Rail Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 8. Colors, Textures, and Grain Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 NON FIRE-RATED INTERIOR DOOR AND SIDELIGHT FRAMES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Basis of Design: Horizontal 5-Panel Contemporary Matte Glass Door by Eggers Industrial an ASSA Abloy Company or equal by the following: a. Marshfield Door System; Signature SeriesTM b. Oshkosh Door Company: Custom Door c. VT Industries, Inc.; Artistry Collection B. Frames, complete with casings, fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant MDF with veneered exposed surfaces. 1. Species: White oak. 2.6 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Exposed and Closet Shelving: Made from one of the following materials, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. 1. Wood boards as specified above for hardwood lumber trim for transparent finish. B. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112; powder-coat-finished steel. C. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; powder-coat-finished steel. D. Clothes Rods and Brackets: 1-5/16-inch- (33-mm-) diameter, chrome-plated-steel telescoping tubes with end brackets for mounting on brackets. E. Rod Flanges: Chrome-plated steel. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY; SECTION 062023 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 9 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. B. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except those with ends exposed in finished work: 1. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds. 2. Wood-board paneling. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound; warped; improperly treated or finished; inadequately seasoned; too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements; or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY; SECTION 062023 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 9 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope and Miter at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.5 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION A. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 32 inches (800 mm) o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. B. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) o.c. and within 6 inches (150 mm) of ends of shelves. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. C. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports. 1. Fasten shelves to cleats with finish nails or trim screws, set flush. 2. Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install rod flanges for rods as indicated. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. Install rods in rod flanges. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY; SECTION 062023 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 9 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes if any. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 062023 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK; SECTION 06 40 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Charred Wood. 2. Interior flush wood paneling 3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing interior architectural woodwork items that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 062023 "Interior Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Wood-Preservative Treatment: Include data and warranty information from chemical- treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material and manufacturer's written warranty. 2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include data and warranty information from chemical- treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. Waterborne Treatments: For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. B. Shop Drawings: For interior architectural woodwork. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK; SECTION 06 40 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including blocking and reinforcement concealed by construction and specified in other Sections. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Lumber for Transparent Finish: Not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 12 inches (300 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Evaluation Reports: For preservative-treated and fire-retardant-treated wood materials, from ICC-ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. 1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant or WI's Certified Compliance Program licensee. B. Installer Qualifications: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant or WI's Certified Compliance Program licensee. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical interior architectural woodwork as indicated by Architect. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver interior architectural woodwork until painting and similar finish operations that might damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK; SECTION 06 40 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Manufacturers: a. Joshtom Millwork LLC; Houston, TX b. Terry Productions, Inc.; Houston, TX c. Williamson Builders Inc.; Cypress, Texas 2.2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. 2.3 FLUSH WOOD PANELING (WOOD-VENEER WALL SURFACING) A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Charred Wood: Shou-Sugi-Ban. C. Matching Method: No matching is required between panels. Select and arrange panels for similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels. D. Exposed Panel Edges: Applied solid-wood banding 11/16 inch (18 mm) thick by depth of panels. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK; SECTION 06 40 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 E. Assemble panels by gluing and concealed fastening. 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of interior architectural woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (76 mm) wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 1. Preservative Treatment: Provide softwood lumber treated by pressure process, AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b. a. Provide where in contact with concrete or masonry. b. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. c. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. d. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. 2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Complying with requirements; provide where indicated. B. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. D. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate interior architectural woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK; SECTION 06 40 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times interior architectural woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. 2.7 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish interior architectural woodwork indicated on Drawings at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of interior architectural woodwork. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Same as item to be finished. 2. Finish: System - 8, water-based cross linking acrylic. 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 6. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 7. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition interior architectural woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing interior architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install interior architectural woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble interior architectural woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK; SECTION 06 40 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 C. Install interior architectural woodwork level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut interior architectural woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4. F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. G. Anchor interior architectural woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with interior architectural woodwork. 1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. H. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches (2400 mm) long except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. 1. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 2. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler; sand smooth; and finish same as wood base if finished. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). I. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of interior architectural woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective interior architectural woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace interior architectural woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean interior architectural woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064023 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural wood cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural wood cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 3. Shop finishing of architectural wood cabinets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural wood cabinets. 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 12 inches (300 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Thermoset decorative panels. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates or WI Certified Compliance Program certificates. D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical plastic-laminate cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of architectural wood cabinets with sequence-matched wood veneers transparent- finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork. B. Manufacturers: 1. Aren Design, Inc.; Dotsero, CO 2. Armani Fine Woodworking; Englewood, CO 3. International Woodwork Corp.; Vail CO 4. Michael Arnett Woodworking; Vail CO 5. Vail Custom Woodworking; Vail CO 2.2 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CABINETS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 2.3 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Custom. B. Type of Construction: Frameless. C. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. D. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: As indicated. 1. Species: [Red oak] [White oak]. 2. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn. 3. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels As indicated. 4. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center-balance match. 6. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain. 7. Comply with veneer and other matching requirements indicated for blueprint-matched paneling. E. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed surfaces, stained to match. 2. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. F. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops. G. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints. 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm) wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay. 4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening. C. Pulls: Solid aluminum bar pulls, fastened from back with two screws. For sliding doors, provide semi-recessed aluminum finger cabinet pulls. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide. D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Standard Duty (Grades 1, 2, and 3): Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers. 2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravel - extension type; zinc-plated, steel ball-bearing slides. 3. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 4. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 5. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2, for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 6. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for computer keyboard shelves. 7. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide. H. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063. I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. L. Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, 3.0 mm thick. M. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated. N. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Shelves: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick. O. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 P. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. E. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. 2.8 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural wood cabinets, as applicable to each unit of work. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of cabinets. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: System - 6, synthetic penetrating oil. 3. Finish: System - 13, catalyzed polyester. 4. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to cabinets made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 6. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 7. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 8. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop finished items use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064113 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 4. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. 5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Thermoset decorative panels. D. Samples for Verification: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 10 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. 2. Wood-grain plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. 3. Thermoset decorative panels, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge. 4. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Thermoset decorative panels. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates or WI Certified Compliance Program certificates. D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical plastic-laminate cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 3 of 10 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Manufacturers: a. Aren Design, Inc.; Dotsero, CO b. International Woodwork Corp.; Vail CO c. Michael Arnett Woodworking; Vail CO WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 4 of 10 2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturers: a. Formica Corporation b. Pionite; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand c. Wilsonart F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: Grade HGS. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels [As indicated]. G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops. I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. J. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints. K. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 5 of 10 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range and listed on the Finish schedule. 2.3 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1. 1. Manufacturers: a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company b. Formica Corporation c. Wilsonart 2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with CSA B45.5/IAPMO Z124. 4. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Custom. B. Configuration: 1. Front: Radius edge with apron, 2 inches (50 mm) high with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. End Splash: None. C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material. D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid surface material. E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop. F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. G. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch (10-mm) radius at juncture of cutout edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening. 2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 6 of 10 2.5 MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood. 2. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, particleboard core except where veneer core is indicated. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 5. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 Tempered. B. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. D. Edgebanding for Thermoset Decorative Panels: PVC or polyester edgebanding matching thermoset decorative panels. E. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; not less than 5.0 mm thick. F. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with two plies not less than 3.0 mm thick and with clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer. 2.6 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening. C. Pulls: Solid aluminum bar pulls, fastened from back with two screws. For sliding doors, provide semi-recessed aluminum finger cabinet pulls. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide. D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Standard Duty (Grades 1, 2, and 3): Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers. 2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravel - extension type; zinc-plated, steel ball-bearing slides. 3. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 7 of 10 4. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 5. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2, for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 6. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for computer keyboard shelves. 7. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide. H. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063. I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. L. Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, 3.0 mm thick. M. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated. N. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Shelves: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick. O. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. P. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: [Unpigmented contact cement] [Resorcinol]. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 8 of 10 shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. E. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 CABINET INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 9 of 10 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 3.3 COUNTERTOP INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. 1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position. 2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width. F. Install backsplashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS; SECTION 06 41 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 10 of 10 C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064116 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS; SECTION 06 43 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 064300 - WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood stairs. 2. Wood railings. 3. Shop finishing of wood stairs and railings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. B. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates or WI Certified Compliance Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood stairs and railings until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If wood stairs and railings must be stored WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS; SECTION 06 43 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood stairs and railings until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood stairs and railings until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where wood stairs and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where wood stairs and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood stairs and railings can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS A. Decorative Railings: 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide “custom rail” indicated on the drawings by one of the following: a. Aren Design, Inc.; Dotsero, CO b. International Woodwork Corp.; Vail CO c. Michael Arnett Woodworking; Vail CO d. Vail Custom Woodworking; Vail CO B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS; SECTION 06 43 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods, including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.3 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood for Transparent Finish: Cedar, quarter sawn. D. Finishes for Stair Parts: Transparent 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm) wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS; SECTION 06 43 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Rough Carriages for Stairs: Laminated veneer lumber, made with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559, and with the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456: 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 3100 psi (21.3 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286-mm actual-) depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13 800 MPa). C. Rough Carriages for Stairs: Select Structural or No. 1 grade and any of the following species, kiln dried to 15 percent maximum moisture content: 1. Hem-fir (north). 2. Southern pine. 3. Douglas fir-larch. 4. Douglas fir-larch (north). 5. Spruce-pine-fir. 6. Hem-fir. 7. Douglas fir-south. 8. Spruce-pine-fir (south). 2.6 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Top Mounted; provide the following: 1. Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. A. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood stairs and railings to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS; SECTION 06 43 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads and risers to carriages. 1. House wall stringers and glue and wedge treads and risers. 2. Fabricate stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated position and no more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) out of relative position for adjacent treads and risers. 2.8 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish wood stairs and railings at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 8, water-based cross linking acrylic. 3. Finish: System - 13, catalyzed polyester. 4. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 6. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 7. Sheen: [Satin, 31-45] [Semigloss, 46-60] gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood stairs and railings to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing wood stairs and railings, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood stairs and railings to comply with same grade as item to be installed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS; SECTION 06 43 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 B. Assemble wood stairs and railings and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Stairs: Securely anchor carriages to supporting substrates. Install stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated position. D. Railings: 1. General: Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) variation from a straight line. 2. Stair Rails: Glue and dowel or pin balusters to treads and railings, and railings to newel posts. 3. Wall Rails: Support rails on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. a. Space rail brackets not more than 4” o.c. E. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood stairs and railings. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective wood stairs and railings, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood stairs and railings. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean wood stairs and railings on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064300 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 06 61 13 - CULTURED MARBLE FABRICATIONS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 06 61 13 - CULTURED MARBLE FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast Polymer a. Tub and Shower Surrounds 2. Shower Pan Liners B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 (06100) - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 06 20 00 (06200) - Finish Carpentry 3. Section 10 28 19.21 – Tub and Shower Doors 4. Section 12 30 00 (06400) - Architectural Woodwork 5. Section 12 36 61 (09385) - Engineered Stone Countertops 6. Division 22 (15) for Plumbing Fixtures 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM) Publications: 1. E84 "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials" B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) Publications: 1. "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" C. Federal Specifications (FS) Publications: 1. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data. C. Product Shop Drawings and Product Data: For each type of product specified. 1. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint details, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes. a. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 06 61 13 - CULTURED MARBLE FABRICATIONS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tub/Shower surrounds, window stools, and lavatory/vanity countertops shall be supplied by one manufacturer. Where shown to be the same color, the color of the components shall match for all items. Refer to Interior Finish Index for colors. B. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Variation in component size: +/- 1/8 inch. 2. Location of openings: +/- 1/8 inch from indicated location. C. Perform work to (custom) quality in accordance with "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cast polymer materials until painting and similar operations that could damage synthetic marble have been completed in installation areas. If cast polymer materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cast polymer materials until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cast polymer materials are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cast polymer materials work by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.07 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Cast polymer materials: 1. Provide one (1) year Warranty against manufacturing defects. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 06 61 13 - CULTURED MARBLE FABRICATIONS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CAST POLYMER A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Simulated Tile Tub/Shower Surrounds: 1) Mincey Marble Manufacturing Co. 2) MPL Corporation B. Fire Hazard Ratings: 1. Classified in accordance local codes and ordinances, ASTM E84 and the following: a. Class A b. Flame Spread: Class A: 0 - 25 c. Smoke Developed: 0-450 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, all products shall be permanently marked on the back side and provided with a temporary removable label on the front side with language clearly certifying compliance with ASTM E84 and indentifying the required Flame Spread Class Rating. C. Tub/Shower Surrounds: 1. Homogeneous minimum 1/4" thick molded panels. Surrounds to be cast polymer wall panels; installed as indicated on Drawings. Provide one piece for each wall. Joints will be permitted at corners only. Sizes as shown on Drawings. Color as shown on Interior Finish Index. a. Surround Pattern: 1) Provide custom pattern as shown on Drawings and Interior Finish Index. 2.02 PREFABRICATED SHOWER FLOOR PAN A. Prefabricated Shower Pan and Curb system for use in locations shown on Drawings shall be one of the following products: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. “HydroBan Shower System”; Laticrete International Inc. b. “Shower Perfect”; Mapei Corp. B. Materials: 1. Laticrete “HydroBan Shower System”: a. Prefabricated and pre-sloped shower pan and curb system with fully integrated drains shall be one-piece lightweight high-density expanded polystyrene pan, and in conformance with IAMPO PS 106 and ANSI A118.10. Where installed in Accessible Roll-In Showers, conform to ANSI A117.1 and all local codes. 1) Size: Custom Size and configuration as shown on Drawings. 2) Provide all required accessories including Laticrete “HydroBan” Adhesive and Sealant materials. To install curb and to waterproof junctions between shower pan and wall board. All as recommended by shower pan manufacturer. 2. Mapei “Shower Perfect”: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 06 61 13 - CULTURED MARBLE FABRICATIONS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 a. Prefabricated and pre-sloped shower pan and curb system with fully integrated drains shall be one-piece lightweight high-density expanded polystyrene pan, and in conformance with ANSI A118.10. Where installed in Accessible Roll-In Showers, conform to ANSI A117.1 and all local codes. 1) Size: Custom Size and configuration as shown on Drawings. 2) Provide all required accessories as recommended by shower pan manufactuer, including sealant materials. 2.03 SHOWER FLOOR PAN LINER WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Waterproof Membrane Material for lining concrete subfloor of tile showers that comply with ANSI 118.10, in locations shown on Drawings shall be one of the following products: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. “Laticrete HydroBan"; Laticrete International Inc. b. “Mapelastic AquaDefense”; Mapei Corp. c. “TEC Hydraflex Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane”, TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. B. Provide all required accessories including preformed inside and outside corners, cap strips, and pipe protrusion collars. 2.04 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed- steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. B. Adhesive and Sealant (Installer to verify products are approved by Cast polymer materials Manufacturer): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. "OSI SF400"; OSI Sealants, Inc. (800-999-8920) b. "PL Premium ‘Polyurethane’ Adhesive"; OSI Sealants, Inc. (800-999-8920) c. "LN-902 Liquid Nails", Liquid Nails, Macco Division of ICI Paints, (800-634-0015) d. "DAP 27404", DAP, Inc. (888-327-8477) e. Or as recommended by cast polymer manufacturer. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Shop assemble cast polymer materials for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. 2. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. a. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. Smooth edges. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work. 3. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trip for scribing and site cutting. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 06 61 13 - CULTURED MARBLE FABRICATIONS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 4. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and fittings. 5. Provide for mounting of soap dishes, grab rails, etc., as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Condition cast polymer materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. All surrounds shall be installed as shown on Drawings and as specified by manufacturer. B. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data. C. Tub/Shower Surrounds: 1. Remove all dust and other contaminants from the back side of all panels before installation. 2. Secure soap dishes to panels with adhesive as recommended by Manufacturer. 3. Hold bottom edge of wall panel above rim of tub and shower for application of sealant as shown on Drawings. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Keep components clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. Keep clean until Date of Substantial Completion. Replace stained and damaged components. B. Protect surfaces from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. Repair work or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to Owner's Representative's satisfaction. END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SECTION 06 61 13 - CULTURED MARBLE FABRICATIONS Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC PANELING; SECTION 06 64 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic sheet paneling; FRP Panel 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide original fire test reports to ensure compliance with the following requirements: 1. ASTM D635 Class: CC1for a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm (0.060 in.). 2. Self-Ignition Temperature: a. ASTM D1929: greater than 650°F 3. Density of Smoke: a. ASTM D2843: Less than 75% 4. Flammability Classification: a. ASTM E-84/UL 723: Smoke less than 450, Flame spread less than 75. D. Impact Resistance: Provide Solid Polymer Fabrications that comply with the following requirements: 1. Impact Strength, Un-notched (23°), ASTM D4812: No breakage 2. Impact Strength, Notched (23°), ASTM D256: 1.7 ft – lbs/in F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC PANELING; SECTION 06 64 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. 2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING FRP|PL-1 A. Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling: FRP with embedding fabrics, metals, natural foliage, wood veneers, and assorted additional core elements. 1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Composites; Varietex b. Marlite®, a Division of Nudo© Products, Inc.; Marlite FRP c. Nudo© Products, Inc.; FiberLite® FRP 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Class A b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. Class A 3. Nominal Thickness: Not less than .09 inch (2.3 mm). 4. Surface Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and as listed on Finish Schedule. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and as listed on Finish Schedule. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. B. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. C. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. D. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC PANELING; SECTION 06 64 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond. B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints where indicated. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately aligned. 1. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. 2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners. D. Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints. E. Install trim accessories with adhesive. F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. H. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC PANELING; SECTION 06 64 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 066400 DIVISION 7 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill THERMAL INSULATION; SECTION 07 21 00 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-fiber blanket. 2. Glass-fiber board. 3. Mineral-wool blanket. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill THERMAL INSULATION; SECTION 07 21 00 PAGE 2 of 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company c. Knauf Insulation d. Owens Corning B. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Kraft Faced: ASTM C 665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier). 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company c. Knauf Insulation d. Owens Corning 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BOARD A. Glass-Fiber Board, Unfaced: ASTM C 612, Type IA; unfaced, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Nominal density of 2.25 lb/cu. ft (36 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C). 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company c. Knauf Insulation d. Owens Corning 2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: a. Roxul Inc. b. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company 2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill THERMAL INSULATION; SECTION 07 21 00 PAGE 3 of 4 1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. 2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill THERMAL INSULATION; SECTION 07 21 00 PAGE 4 of 4 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity. B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF REFLECTIVE INSULATION A. Install sheet reflective insulation according to ASTM C 727. B. Install sheet radiant barriers according to ASTM C 1744. C. Install interior radiation control coating system according to ASTM C 1321. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS); SECTION 07 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 072413 - POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Repair and recoat of existing EIFS / Polymer Stucco wall assembly. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in EIFS with elastomeric joint sealants and for perimeter joints between EIFS and other materials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASTM E 2110 apply to Work of this Section. B. EIFS: Exterior insulation and finish system(s). C. IBC: International Building Code. D. Polymer-Based Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Class PB EIFS, as defined in ASTM E 2568. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each EIFS component. B. Shop Drawings: For prefabricated EIFS panels. 1. Include elevations, showing extent of repairs and recoat. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For cementitious materials and aggregates and for insulation. B. Product Test Reports: For each EIFS assembly and component, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS); SECTION 07 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 D. Evaluation Reports: For EIFS, including insulation fasteners, flexible membrane flashing, from ICC-ES. E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products. B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes. 1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace EIFS that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty coverage includes the following EIFS components: a. EIFS finish coat. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS); SECTION 07 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. BASF Corporation; Wall Systems 2. Sto Corp B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as tested and compatible with EIFS components. 2.2 EIFS MATERIALS A. Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to protect substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate and insulation adhesive. B. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat. C. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's siliconized acrylic-based coating complying with the following: 1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. 2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat. E. Water: Potable. F. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784 and ASTM C 1063. 1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg. 2. Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg. 3. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of movement. 4. Windowsill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over framing beneath windows; with end and back dams; designed to direct water to exterior. 2.3 MIXING A. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS); SECTION 07 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections indicated below and to prepare test reports: 1. Shop welds are subject to testing and inspection. 2. Testing and inspecting agency shall interpret tests and report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Correct deficiencies in or replace EIFS prefabricated panels that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with requirements. 4. Additional testing and inspection, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. As stipulated in Ch. 17 of the IBC. 2. According to ICC-ES AC24. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. EIFS Tests and Inspections: According to ASTM E 2568 and ICC-ES AC24. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. 1. Concrete Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by EIFS manufacturer. 3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 1397, ASTM E 2511, and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate. 3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION A. Primer/Sealer: Apply over existing masonry substrates and where required by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS); SECTION 07 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 B. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Apply and lap to shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where required by EIFS manufacturer. Prime substrates if required and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details. 3.5 REPAIR FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. 1. Embed aggregate in finish coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform applied-aggregate finish of color and texture matching approved sample. C. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS manufacturer. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings. END OF SECTION 072413 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS); SECTION 07 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT FIRESTOPPING; SECTION 07 84 43 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for firestop tracks for metal-framed partition heads. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire- resistance-rated assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT FIRESTOPPING; SECTION 07 84 43 PAGE 2 of 6 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT FIRESTOPPING; SECTION 07 84 43 PAGE 3 of 6 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M Fire Protection Products b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed. C. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT FIRESTOPPING; SECTION 07 84 43 PAGE 4 of 6 C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2393. B. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire- resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT FIRESTOPPING; SECTION 07 84 43 PAGE 5 of 6 B. Where Intertek Group-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek Group's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under product category Firestop Systems. C. Floor-to-Floor, Joint Firestopping Systems: 1. 2 Hour Construction: UL System FF-D-1013; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672. D. Wall-to-Wall, Joint Firestopping Systems: 1. 1 Hour Construction: UL System WW-D-0067; Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. 2. 2 Hour Construction: UL System WW-D-0067; Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. E. Floor-to-Wall, Joint Firestopping Systems: Not used F. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping Systems: 1. UL-3. Top of Wall Joints at Underside of Flat Concrete: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-1068; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672. b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-1068; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672. 2. Top of Wall Joints at Concrete Over Metal Deck, Wall Parallel to Ribs: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0184; Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System HW-D-0049; Hilti CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray and CP 672. G. Penetrations Through Gypsum Board Walls, Joint Firestopping Systems: 1. Blank Openings: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-3334; Hilti CP 653 Speed Sleeve. b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-3334; Hilti CP 653 Speed Sleeve. 2. Penetrations By: Uninsulated Non-Metallic Pipe, Conduit, and Tubing: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-2078; Hilti CP 643N/644 Firestop Collar. b. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-2128; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. 3. Penetrations By: Insulated Pipes: a. 2 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5029; Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant. b. 1 Hour Construction: UL System W-L-5028; Hilti FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Firestop Sealant. END OF SECTION 078443 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT FIRESTOPPING; SECTION 07 84 43 PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT SEALANTS; SECTION 07 92 00 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 3. Urethane joint sealants. 4. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 5. Acoustical sealants. 6. Latex joint sealants. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by [manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency] [a qualified testing agency]. C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for each joint sealant and substrate material to be tested: 1. Joint-sealant location and designation. 2. Manufacturer and product name. 3. Type of substrate material. 4. Proposed test. 5. Number of samples required. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT SEALANTS; SECTION 07 92 00 PAGE 2 of 8 D. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are needed for adhesion. E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. F. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials. 3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with stone substrates. 4. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials. 5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers. 7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT SEALANTS; SECTION 07 92 00 PAGE 3 of 8 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Corporation b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT SEALANTS; SECTION 07 92 00 PAGE 4 of 8 2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248. B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Corporation b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. 2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants c. Tremco Incorporated 2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Corporation b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.7 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT SEALANTS; SECTION 07 92 00 PAGE 5 of 8 a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. b. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) c. Tremco Incorporated 2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT SEALANTS; SECTION 07 92 00 PAGE 6 of 8 operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Masonry. b. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT SEALANTS; SECTION 07 92 00 PAGE 7 of 8 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints between differing materials listed above and curtain wall b. Reseal exterior wall as required c. Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces. d. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.. e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 50/50. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-# . 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring. d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement JS-#. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and elevator entrances. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill JOINT SEALANTS; SECTION 07 92 00 PAGE 8 of 8 2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#A. 1. Joint Location: a. Acoustical joints where indicated. b. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION 079200 DIVISION 8 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 11 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 11 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY 3. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature- rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 11 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. 2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Commercial Doors and Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 861. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.) c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). d. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam. e. Core: Steel stiffened. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm) for door openings 48 inches (1219 mm) or less; minimum thickness of 0.067 inch (1.7 mm)for door openings greater than 48 inches (1219 mm). b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same material as adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.) c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Polystyrene, Vertical steel stiffener. 1) Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.370 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 11 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.5 BORROWED LITES A. Hollow-metal frames of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). B. Construction: Full profile welded. 2.6 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick. 2. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5- mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. 2.7 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 11 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation. 2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. 4. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Sidelite Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high. b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. 4. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1067 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 5. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm) above finish floor with a 90 - degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 11 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with [butted] [or] [mitered] hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow- metal work. 2. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Louvers: Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032- inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame. 1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted-V or inverted-Y blades. B. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 11 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM- HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 11 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow- metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ALUMINUM FRAMES: SECTIION 08 12 16 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 081216 - ALUMINUM FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior aluminum frames for doors. 2. Interior aluminum frames for glazing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, fire-resistance rating, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum frames: 1. Include elevations, sections, and installation details for each wall-opening condition. 2. Include details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 3. Include locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware. 4. Include details of anchorages, joints, field splices, connections, and accessories. 5. Include details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of the following products: 1. Framing Member and Finish: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include trim. 2. Corner Fabrication and Finish: 12-by-12-inch- (300-by-300-mm-) long, full-size window corner, including full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish. 3. Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) square. D. Product Schedule: For aluminum frames. Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum frames to include in maintenance manuals. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ALUMINUM FRAMES: SECTIION 08 12 16 PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of each type of aluminum frame and door in typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General: Provide a written guarantee for aluminum framed office fronts and door assemblies against all defects in materials and workmanship agreeing to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within two years from the date of Substantial Completion. B. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following. 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 2. Faulty operation of operators and hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other frame component materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior aluminum office fronts and folding (and stacking) door system by PK30 System LLC or equal by one of the following: 1. Dual Lock Partition Systems, Inc.; Avalon International Aluminum 2. Frameworks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum frames from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum-framed office fronts and doors of dimensions and configurations shown, complying with performance requirements indicated, based on manufacturer's testing of doors representative of those specified: 1. Aluminum frames and fixed panels shall withstand gravity loads and a lateral deflection is limited to the lesser of L/175 or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, when tested under a uniformly distributed load of 5 lb/sq. ft. (24.4 kg/sq. m) according to ASTM E 72. 2. Glazing Rebates: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass panel edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ALUMINUM FRAMES: SECTIION 08 12 16 PAGE 3 of 6 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), with alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, and not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. C. Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for 1/4” glass thickness. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded rubber or plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated; in black. C. Glass: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." D. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." 2.5 FABRICATION A. Provide shop assembled panels with hardware and accessories required for a complete assembly. Provide concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit components that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Fabricate panels with continuous light-and-sound seals at floor, ceiling, and other locations where panels abut fixed construction. B. Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame. 1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors. D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. E. Employ standard or heavy duty door hardware based on total door weight, with a maximum door weight for standard sliding door hardware of up to 176 lbs (80 Kg)and a maximum door weight of up to 353 lbs (160Kg) for heavy duty sliding door hardware; with the following component weights: 1. Weight of frame: Standard 4 ft. x 8 ft. (1.22M x 2.44M) frame weighs 29 lbs (13 Kg). 2. Infill Panels: 1/4-inch (6mm) glass panels weigh 3.24 lbs (1.47Kg) per square foot and 1/4-inch (6mm) acrylic panels weigh 1.7 lbs (0.77 Kg) per square foot. 3. Factory glaze panels to the greatest extent possible. 4. Fixed Panels: Provide fixed panels with integral height adjusters built into a reveal channel mounted inboard of the top and bottom panel rails to allow for precision field adjustment and alignment of system elements. F. Swing Doors: Center Pivots; with surface mounted door pull; with an overhead combination angle stop/ball catch. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ALUMINUM FRAMES: SECTIION 08 12 16 PAGE 4 of 6 1. Center pivot hinges adapted to incorporate a walking beam top jamb portion; with pivot point location adjustable along the width of the door. G. Bottom guide Channel: 1. Provide lower guide channel for sliding doors with a travel distance that is greater than the door width. 2. Provide a fixed point bottom guide for bypassing and pocket doors. 2.6 DOOR HARDWARE A. General; Provide manufacturers heavy duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled or required for operation of each type of door/panel assembly, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by the manufacturer for the service required. Finish hardware items to match or compliment the finish of the door/panel assemblies. B. Use manufacturer's door hardware groups, recommended for each condition of use. C. Operating hardware for hinged doors 1. Center pivot hinge sets - Rixson 320 top pivot jamb portion, PK30 System top and bottom door portion and 1NT403 CRL Adjustable free-swinging floor pivot, bottom jamb portion, from C.R. Laurence Co. Inc. D. Locking hardware for hinged doors. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: FSB USA, which is located at: 1 Bishop Ln. ; Madison, CT 06443; Tel: 203-404-4700; Fax: 203-404-4710; Email: info@fsbusa.com ; Web: www.fsbusa.com a. Full mortise locks, Series SM 2.5-inch (64mm) backset. ANSI A 156.13, series 1000, mortise locks and latches, Grade 1. b. Lock function and lever/knob trim as selected by Architect from FSB catalog. E. Install hardware, except surface mounted hardware, at the fabrication plant. Remove only as required for final finishing operation, and delivery and installation at the project site 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 61, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.07 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Black. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ALUMINUM FRAMES: SECTIION 08 12 16 PAGE 5 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size of indicated aluminum frame. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. At fire-protection-rated openings, install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80[ and NFPA 105]. B. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths with no piece less than 48 inches (1220 mm); components 96 inches (2450 mm) or shorter shall be one piece. 1. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum [48-inch (1220-mm)] <Insert number> centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer. 2. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections. 3. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members. 4. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. C. Glass: Install glass according to Section 088000 "Glazing" and aluminum-frame manufacturer's written instructions. D. Doors: Install doors aligned with frames and fitted with required hardware. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Inspect installation, correct misalignments, and tighten loose connections. B. Doors: Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended in writing by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610. D. Touch Up: Repair marred frame surfaces to blend inconspicuously with adjacent unrepaired surface[ so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches (1220 mm)] as viewed by Architect. Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. END OF SECTION 081216 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ALUMINUM FRAMES: SECTIION 08 12 16 PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUSH WOOD DOORS; SECTION 08 14 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Hollow-core doors with wood-veneer faces 3. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required. c. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory- finished doors. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUSH WOOD DOORS; SECTION 08 14 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067- by-2134-mm) section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 4. Warranty Period for Hollow-Core Interior Doors: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ampco Products, LLC 2. Eggers Industries WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUSH WOOD DOORS; SECTION 08 14 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 3. Graham Wood Doors; ASSA ABLOY Group company 4. Poncraft Door Company B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors indicated to be blueprint matched with paneling from single manufacturer. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extra Heavy Duty: Public toilets, janitor's closets. 3. Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets). C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 3. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 4. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 5. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 6. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel[ same color as doors]. b. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices). D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784. E. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows: a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUSH WOOD DOORS; SECTION 08 14 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. c. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. 3. Provide doors with structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. F. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N). b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N). G. Hollow-Core Doors: 1. Construction: Institutional hollow core. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows: a. 5-by-18-inch (125-by-460-mm) lock blocks at both stiles. b. 5-inch (125-mm) top-and bottom-rail blocking. c. 10-inch (250-mm) top- and bottom-rail blocking. d. 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) midrail blocking. 2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: As indicated on Drawings 3. Cut: Rotary cut. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor- door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet (3 m) or more. 8. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A. 9. Core: Structural composite lumber. 10. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. 11. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. B. Interior Hollow-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: As indicated on Drawings 3. Cut: Rotary cut. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A. 8. Construction: Seven plies. 9. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUSH WOOD DOORS; SECTION 08 14 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 2.4 LOW PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE (LPDL) FACED DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acrovyn vinyl clad flush door. 2. Eggers Industries – eiDoor. 3. The Maiman Company – Thermal Fused. B. Low Pressure Decorative Laminate (LPDL) Thermal Fused Faces: 1. Low pressure decorative laminates faces thermally fused to cores under heat and pressure, complying with Laminating Materials Association’s Product Standard and Typical Physical Properties of Decorative Overlays. LMA.2003. 2. Color or Wood Grain Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufactures standards and as listed on Drawings. C. Exposed Edges: Impact resistant polymer edging, minimum .040” thick, applied to all four edges after faces. D. Polymer Edging Color or Wood Grain Pattern: Manufacturer's standard color that most closely matches faces. E. Provide doors with pilot holes factory drilled for vertical edge hinges and lock sets. F. Where continuous hinges are specified, provide coarse thread particle board screws designed for use in dense wood. 2.5 BLOCKING A. Non-Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Provide blocking as indicated below: a. HB1: 5 inch in doors indicated to have closers and overhead stops. b. HB2: 5 inch bottom rail blocking, in doors indicated to have kick plates. c. HB3: 5 inch top and bottom rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers and kick plates. d. HB4: Two 5 inch x 14 inch lock blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. e. HB5: Two 5 inch x 14 inch corner blocking, in doors indicated to have flush bolts. f. HB6: 5 inch mid-rail blocking in doors indicated to have exit devices. g. HB7: 5 inch stile blocking. h. HB8: Two 5 inch x 14 inch corner blocking and two 5 inch x 14 inch lock blocking on doors to have vertical rod exit devices. B. Fire Rated Doors: 1. Provide blocking as indicated below: a. HB1: 5 inch in doors indicated to have closers and overhead stops. b. HB2: 5 inch bottom rail blocking, in doors indicated to have kick plates. c. HB3: 5 inch top and bottom rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers and kick plates. d. HB4: Two 5 inch x 14 inch lock blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. e. HB5: Two 5 inch x 14 inch corner blocking, in doors indicated to have flush bolts. f. HB8: Two 5 inch x 14 inch corner blocking and two 5 inch x 14 inch lock blocking on doors to have vertical rod exit devices. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUSH WOOD DOORS; SECTION 08 14 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 2.6 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Recessed tapered beads. 3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood- veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated. C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. D. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUSH WOOD DOORS; SECTION 08 14 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 2.8 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 9, UV curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. D. Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 9, UV curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane. 3. Finish: WDMA OP-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire- WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUSH WOOD DOORS; SECTION 08 14 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. b. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 31 13 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection and temperature-rise limit ratings indicated, according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: a. Babcock-Davis b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group c. Karp Associates, Inc. 2. Description: Face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Wall. 4. Door Size: 3’-0” by 4’-0”. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage, factory finished. 6. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door. 7. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, key operated with interior release. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 31 13 PAGE 2 of 4 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. D. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063. E. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. F. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face. G. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2. For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc- coated expanded-metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames. D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. Provide access sleeves for each latch operator and install in holes cut through finish. 1. For recessed doors with plaster infill, provide self-furring expanded-metal lath attached to door panel. E. Latch and Lock Hardware: 1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 3. Mortise Cylinder Preparation: Where indicated, prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." F. Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 31 13 PAGE 3 of 4 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 2. Factory Finished: Apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat finish immediately after cleaning and pretreating, with minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. END OF SECTION 083113 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES; SECTION 08 31 13 PAGE 4 of 4 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 13 SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Fixed aluminum windows for exterior locations at punched openings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum- framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 13 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. C. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-control reports. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals. B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed storefront to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase quality-control program. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.7 MOCKUPS A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 13 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION LABORATORY MOCKUPS A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform testing on preconstruction laboratory mockups. B. Build preconstruction laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, products, and methods of construction that will be used at Project site. 1. Size and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when preconstruction laboratory mockups will be constructed and tested. C. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Program: Test preconstruction laboratory mockups according to requirements in "Performance Requirements" Article. Perform the following tests in the following order: 1. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 50 percent of positive test load. 2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. 3. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. 4. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: AAMA 501.1. 5. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 percent of positive and negative test loads. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. 6. Interstory Drift: AAMA 501.4 at 100 percent of design displacement. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. 7. Vertical Interstory Movement: AAMA 501.7. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. 8. Thermal Cycling: According to AAMA 501.5. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. 9. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 and 150 percent of positive and negative test loads. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 13 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 13 D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) clearance between framing members and operable units. 3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows: a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m) or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m). E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). 2. Entrance Doors: a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5.08 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). 2. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 13 I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.55 W/sq. m x K) as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 15 as determined according to NFRC 500. J. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as follows. 1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 26. K. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal- surface temperature of 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C). c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C). 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. EFCO Corporation 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company 3. U.S. Aluminum; a brand of C.R. Laurence 4. YKK AP America Inc B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.3 FRAMING A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Nonthermal 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 13 C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/4-inch (50.8- to 57.2-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width. Wide stile: 5” where noted in hardware schedule. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products complying with BHMA standard referenced. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 13 a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf (133 N)to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open the door to its minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. C. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 3. Quantities: a. For doors up to 87 inches (2210 mm) high, provide three hinges per leaf. b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches (2210 and up to 3048 mm) high, provide four hinges per leaf. D. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. E. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. F. Cylinders: As specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." 1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include notation to be furnished by Owner. G. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. H. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. I. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, extruded aluminum. 1. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used. J. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force. K. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. L. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 9 of 13 M. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. N. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. O. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2.6 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from 300 series stainless steel. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 10 of 13 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system. F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 11 of 13 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." G. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 12 of 13 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces about in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum- framed entrances and storefronts. 1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect. C. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2. 1. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade. 2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing. D. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. 2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS; SECTION 08 41 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 13 of 13 lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 3.7 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS HW-AL-01 EXTERIOR REMOTE ENTRY DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 1 CONT. HINGE DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 EXIT DEVICE 9300-01 Section 08 7111 630 DAH 1 CARD EXIT TRIM MT RFID BLE READY CONT Section 08 7111 626 SAF 1 OH STOP 1000SL Section 08 7111 630 ABH 1 PULL DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 SURFACE CLOSER DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 SET SEAL DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 DOOR BOTTOMS DOOR/RAME MFG. 1 THRESHOLD DOOR/FRAME MFG. NOTE: DOORS MUST BE WIDE STILE 5” MIN. TO ALLOW MOUNTING OF EXIT DEVICE. HW-AL-02 POOL ENTRY DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 1 CONT. HINGE DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 SET PUSH PULLS DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 DEADLOCK MS1850S - DOOR/FRAME MFG. 2 CYLINDERS 97T Section 08 7111 626 DAH 2 PERM. CORES 77 Section 08 7111 626 DAH 1 SURFACE CLOSER DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 MAGNETIC LOCK EML310 BA DP TS Section 08 7111 628 DAH 1 FLOOR STOP 1214 Section 08 7111 626 TRI 2 REMOTE READERS RCU BLE READY X (1) 32280 POWER SUPPLY 630 SAF Section 08 7111 NOTE: DEADLOCK TO BE ENGAGE IF POOL PERMANENTLY LOCKED HW-AL-03 EXTERIOR EXIT PAIR DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 2 CONT. HINGE DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 EXIT DEVICE CD9600-03 MLR MS Section 08 7111 630 DAH 1 CYLINDER RIM 87T Section 08 7111 630 DAH 2 CYLINDER MORTISE 97T Section 08 7111 630 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 Section 08 7111 626 DAH 1 EXIT DEVICE CD9600-01 MLR MS Section 08 7111 630 DAH 2 OH STOP 1000SL Section 08 7111 630 ABH 2 PULL DOOR/FRAME MFG. 2 CLOSER DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 SET SEAL DOOR/FRAME MFG. 2 DOOR BOTTOMS DOOR/RAME MFG. 1 THRESHOLD DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 REMOTE READER RCU BLE READY X 32280 POWER SUPPLY 630 SAF Section 08 7111 END OF SECTION 084113 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 12 SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes exterior and interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers. B. Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. C. IBC: International Building Code. D. Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing. E. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks that control automatic entrances. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified elsewhere. B. Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrances. C. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware required for rest of Project. D. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances with connections to power supplies and access-control system. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 12 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment details. 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices. 5. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For automatic entrances. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of automatic entrance. Include emergency-exit features of automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress. C. Product Test Reports: For each type of automatic entrance, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who employs a Certified Inspector. 1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. C. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 12 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding automatic entrances from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Automatic entrances shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Seismic Loads: As Indicated on Drawings 2. Wind Loads: As Indicated on Drawings B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 12 C. Operating Temperature Range: Automatic entrances shall operate within minus 20 to plus 122 deg F (minus 29 to plus 50 deg C). D. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25 cfm/sq. ft. (6.4 L/s x sq. m) of fixed entrance-system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). E. Opening Force: 1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width. 2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required for a breakaway door or panel to open. F. Entrapment-Prevention Force: 1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent stopped door from closing. 2.3 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Sliding Automatic Entrance: 1. Biparting-Sliding Units: 2. Manufacturers: a. Besam Entrance Solutions; ASSA ABLOY b. DORMA USA, Inc. c. Horton Automatics; a division of Overhead Door Corporation 3. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors with two sliding leaves, and sidelites on each side. a. Traffic Pattern: Two way b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: As indicated on Drawings. c. Mounting: Between jambs. 4. Operator Features: a. Power opening and closing. b. Drive System: Belt. c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. d. Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds. e. Obstruction recycle. f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator. 5. Sliding-Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered, ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 12 a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers for each active leaf. 6. Sliding-Door Threshold: Threshold members and bottom-guide-track system with stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels. a. Configuration: No threshold across door opening and recessed guide-track system at sidelites. 7. Controls: Activation and safety devices as indicated on Drawings and according to BHMA standards. a. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door. b. Activation Device: Future Card Reader c. Safety Device: Presence sensor mounted on each side of door header and two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs on one side of the door to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing. d. Safety Device: Control mat(s) installed on egress side of door to detect pedestrians in presence and safety zones and to prevent door from closing. e. Opening-Width Control: Two-position switch that in the normal position allows sliding doors to travel to full opening width and in the alternate position reduces opening to a selected partial opening width. 8. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), and header with Class I, clear anodic finish, finish matching adjacent storefront. 9. Metal Cladding and Finish: Clad framing, door(s), and header with No. 4 directional- satin-finish stainless-steel sheet; metal sheet in finish matching adjacent storefront. 2.4 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS A. Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings; 1-3/4 by 6 inches (45 by 150 mm) 2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wall thickness. B. Stile and Rail Doors: 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick, glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2- mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 2. Stile Design: As indicated on Drawings; Medium stile, 3-1/2-inch (90-mm) nominal width. 3. Rail Design: As indicated on Drawings, 5-inch (125-mm) nominal height. 4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile design and finish. C. Sidelite(s): 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) deep sidelite(s) with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design. D. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 12 hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing. 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb (79 kg) per leaf over spans up to 14 feet (4.3 m) without intermediate supports. a. Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 14 feet (4.3 m). E. Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. F. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard. 1. Application Process: Door manufacturer's standard process. 2. Provide sign materials with instructions for field application after glazing is installed. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 2. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness, in entrance manufacturer's standard thickness. F. Polycarbonate Sheet: ASTM C 1349, Appendix X1, Type II, coated, mar-resistant, UV-stabilized polycarbonate with coating on both surfaces. G. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." H. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." I. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; of consistency suitable for application. J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. K. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 12 2.6 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS A. General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices, according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. B. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement. 1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads. 2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid- state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power off. C. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; fully enclosed by its plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. 1. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection. 2. For one-way traffic, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully closed. D. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, active-infrared scanner units; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain active at all times. E. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed. F. Key Switch: Recess-mounted, door-control switch with key-controlled actuator; enclosed in 2- by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) junction box. Provide faceplate engraved with letters indicating switch functions. 1. Face-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Functions: Two-way automatic, hold open, one-way exit, off, full open, and partial open. 3. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings, Recess mounted in wall. G. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted. 2.7 HARDWARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish. B. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Device that allows door to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force to open door shall be as stipulated in "Performance Requirements" Article. Interrupt powered operation of door operator while in breakaway mode. C. Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn, with minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) long throw bolt; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 12 1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, six-pin mortise type. a. Keying: Integrate into building master key system. D. Automatic Locking: Electrically controlled device mounted in header that automatically locks sliding door against sliding when in closed position. Provide fail [secure] [safe] operation if power fails. 1. Include concealed, vertical-rod exit devices, UL 305, with latching into threshold and overhead carrier assembly and released by push paddle; and that prevent emergency breakaway doors from swinging unless released to permit emergency egress. 2. Include locking devices for sidelites to prevent manual break out. E. Weather Stripping: Replaceable components. 1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon- fabric or aluminum-strip backing. 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match framing. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site. 1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads. 2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. 3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 6. Fabricate exterior components to drain condensation and water passing joints within system to the exterior. 7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from building structure. 8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 9 of 12 C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. D. Metal Cladding: Factory-fabricated and installed metal cladding, completely covering all visible surfaces as part of prefabricated entrance assembly before shipment to Project site. 1. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. 2. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 3. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 4. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 5. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within system to the exterior. 6. Allow for thermal expansion at exterior entrances. E. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. F. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual." G. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. 1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors. H. Controls: 1. General: Factory install activation and safety devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel. 2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above finished floor as follows: a. Top Beam: 48 inches (1219 mm) 2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 10 of 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic entrance installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, and connection to the building's power supply. 1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. 2. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 3. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. 3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. 4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system. D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as specified in Section 281300 "Access Control." E. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect control wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." F. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." G. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to provide weathertight installation. 1. Set thresholds, framing members and flashings in full sealant bed. 2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 11 of 12 H. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door as required by cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. I. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Certified Inspector: Owner will engage a Certified Inspector to test and inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Test and inspect each automatic entrance, using AAADM inspection forms, to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards. C. Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards. 1. Adjust exterior doors for weathertight closure. B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" for cleaning and maintaining glass. 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES; SECTION 08 42 29.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 12 of 12 1. Engage a Certified Inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair and at end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to Owner. 2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week, emergency callback service. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances. END OF SECTION 084229.23 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 1 of 22 SECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1.3 COORDINATION A. Floor-Recessed Door Hardware: Coordinate layout and installation with floor construction. 1. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. E. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 2 of 22 1. Conference participants shall include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. C. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified, in manufacturer's standard size. 1. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed product, in each finish specified. 1. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2-by-4-inch (51-by-102-mm) Samples for sheet and 4-inch (102-mm) long Samples for other products. a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements. 2. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule. E. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 3 of 22 2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. e. Fastenings and other installation information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. F. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware. 1. Certify that door hardware for use on each type and size of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 4 of 22 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. D. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 5 of 22 a. Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Concealed Closers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water. C. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design". 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 6 of 22 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch. 5. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position. 2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule. 1. Door hardware is scheduled in Part 3. 2.4 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1.Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. 1. Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries b. Hager Companies c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company B. Antifriction-Bearing Hinges: 1. Mounting: Full mortise (butts). 2. Bearing Material: Manufacturer's standard antifriction bearing, Grade 2 (standard weight). 3. Base and Pin Metal: Stainless steel with stainless-steel pin 4. Pins: Nonremovable. 5. Tips: Flat button. 6. Corners: 5/32-inch (4-mm) radius. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw. C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) unless otherwise indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 7 of 22 D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: Cast. 2. Escutcheons (Roses): Forged. 3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. E. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. F. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. G. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 1. Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware – dorma + kaba. b. Schlage Lock; a division of Allegion. c. Sargent Lock; a division of ASSA ABLOY. H. Cylindrical Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 4000. 1. Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware – dorma + kaba. b. Schlage Lock; a division of Allegion. c. Sargent Lock; a division of ASSA ABLOY. I. Cylindrical Locks: BHMA A156.3; Grade 2; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 4000. 1. Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware – dorma + kaba. b. Schlage Lock; a division of Allegion. c. Sargent Lock; a division of ASSA ABLOY. 2.6 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. 1. Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware; dorma + kaba. b. Von Duprin; a division of Allegion. c. Sargent Lock; a division of ASSA ABLOY. d. Precision Hardware; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 8 of 22 B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. C. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. D. Exit Devices: Grade 1. 1. Actuating Bar: Push Bar. 2. Guarded Latchbolts. 3. Material: Stainless steel. 4. Electrified Features: a. Push pad monitor switch. b. Electric locking and unlocking. c. Fail-secure electric latch retraction (dogging) that engages latch when fire-alarm system is activated. E. Exit Device Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match design for lock trim unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware – dorma + kaba. b. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. c. Schlage Lock; a division of Allegion. d. Sargent Lock; a division of ASSA ABLOY. B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 Patented permanent cores; face finished to match lockset. 1. Core Type: Removable. 2. Number of Pins: Seven. C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame. 1. Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware; dorma + kaba. b. HES; a division of ASSA ABLOY. c. Schlage Lock; a division of Allegion. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 9 of 22 2. Material: Stainless steel. 3. Mounting: Mortised. 4. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Use fail-secure electric strikes with fire-rated devices. 2.9 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. 1. New System: a. Master key or grand master key locks to New Patented SFIC System. B. Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2.10 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware; dorma + kaba. 1) Design Standard – DORMA 8616 FC / 7414 FC IS 2.11 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16 1. Manufacturers: a. Trimco b. Don Jo c. Ives; a division of Allegion d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; a division of ASSA ABLOY. B. Dome-Type Floor Stop: Grade 2; with minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high bumper for doors without threshold and 1-3/8-inch- (35-mm-) high bumper for doors with threshold. 1. Provide with extruded-aluminum riser for carpet installations. C. Wall Bumpers: Grade 2; with rubber bumper; 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) diameter, minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) projection from wall; with backplate for concealed fastener installation. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 10 of 22 1. Bumper Configuration: Convex. 2.12 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: a. Nation Guard Products b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; a division of ASSA ABLOY. c. Reese Enterprises d. Zero International B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E 283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa), as follows: 1. Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) of door opening. 2. Gasketing on Double Doors: 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of door opening. C. Door Sweeps: Nylon brush gasket material held in place by flat housing or flange; surface mounted to face of door with screws. 1. Housing or Flange Material: Aluminum. 2.13 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Nation Guard Products b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; a division of ASSA ABLOY. c. Reese Enterprises d. Zero International B. Interlocking Thresholds: Fluted-top metal member with integral lip designed to engage a hook strip applied to door. 1. Type: Single lip with thermal barrier. 2. Base Metal: Extruded bronze. 2.14 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16. 1. Manufacturers: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 11 of 22 a. Trimco b. Don Jo c. Ives; a division of Allegion d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; a division of ASSA ABLOY. B. Wide-Angle Door Viewers: Grade 1; solid brass with optical glass lenses; adjustable to door thickness and permitting one-way observation with minimum 190-degree viewing angle. C. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 2.15 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fire-Rated Applications: a. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 12 of 22 2.16 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 13 of 22 B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. E. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening with electrified door hardware. F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware. I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 14 of 22 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 70 degrees and so that closing time complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 15 of 22 3.9 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW-1 GUESTROOM ENTRY DOOR – No new Entry hardware at this time – 08 19 2016 DOORS: EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 450 652 BOM 1 GUEST CARD LOCK QUANTUM MT RFID BLE READY CONT. 626 SAF 1 CLOSER 7414-FC IS 689 DAH 1 GASKETING S773D D PEM 1 DOOR BOTTOM 2170DV – NOTCHED A PEM 1 VINYL THRESHOLD V2325 B PEM 1 PRIVACY LATCH PDL 626 PEM 1 ONE WAY VIEWER 976U X LENS COVER 2 EA. @ ACCESSIBLE ROOMS 626 TRI HW-2 BATH | CLOSET DOORS: EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US3 BOM 1 PRIVACY SET F10-LAT SCHLAGE 1 WALL STOP 1270WVCP TRIMCO 3 SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO HW-3 BATH ADA DOORS: EACH PAIR TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-4 GUESTROOM CONNECTING DOORS DOORS: EACH PAIR TO HAVE: 4 SPRING HINGES LB4310C 450 652 BOM 2 HINGES LB8000 450 652 BOM 2 CONT. LOCK C525 LCC 626 DAH 2 CONT. DEADBOLT D881 626 DAH 2 PRIVACY LATCH PDL 626 PEM 2 GASKETING S773D D PEM 2 DOOR BOTTOMS 4131 CRL C PEM 1 VINVYL THRESHOLD ADJ232V 14-36 B PEM 2 WALL STOPS 1270W 630 TRI NOTE: DELETE WALL STOPS PROVIDE OH STOPS BELOW AT DOORS IN CONFLICT WITH OTHER DOORS, WALLS OR FURNITURE. 2 OH STOP 700S 689 DAH HW-5 EXTERIOR STAIRS DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: EXISTING TO REMAIN HW-6 INTERIOR EXIT CORRIDOR DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 16 of 22 HW-7 INTERIOR STAIRS DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 EXIT DEVICE F9300-YC23 630 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616-AF89 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B3E 630 TRI 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEAL S88D D PEM 1 DOOR FOTTOM 18100CNB C PEM HW-8 INTERIOR STAIRS DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-9 RESTROOM ENTRY DOORS: EACH TO HAVE; 3 HINGES LB5004 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 PUSH PLATE 1001-11 630 TRI 1 PULL PLATE 1014-3B 630 TRI 1 CLOSER 8616FC- AF86 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .059 B4E 630 TRI 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM HW-10 MASSAGE DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US3 BOM 1 PRIVACY SET F10-LAT SCHLAGE 1 WALL STOP 1270WVCP TRIMCO 3 SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO HW-11 MEETING ROOM DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-12 MEETING ROOM SINGLE DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5004 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 UTILITY CARD LOCK QUANTUM MT. RFID CONT. 626 SAF 1 CLOSERS 8616-FC-S-DST 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATES 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM 1 VIEWER 976 626 TRI NOTE: VIEWER ORIENTED TO LOOK INTO ROOM WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 17 of 22 HW-13 EXTERIOR MEETING ROOMS DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 1 CONT. HINGE FM** 628 BOM 1 EXIT DEVICE 9300-01 630 DAH 1 CARD EXIT TRIM MT RFID CONT. 626 SAF 1 CLOSER 8616-FC-S-DS 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 SET TRIM S88D D PEM 1 DOOR BOTTOM 233ANB A PEM 1 THRESHOLD 2005AT-FHSL14200 A PEM 1 DRIP CAP 346C C PEM HW-14 OFFICES. DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 UTILITY CARD LOCK QUANTUM MT. RFID CONT. 626 SAF 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 3 SILENCERS 1229A GRAY TRI HW-15 STORAGE DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 45 652 BOM 1 STOREROOM LOCK C880T LCC 626 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 626 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616-FC ISH 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM HW-16 STEWARD STORAGE/GEN. MANGER/ OFFICES DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 OFFICE LOCK C853T LCC 626 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 626 DAH 1 WALL STOP 1270W OMIT @ 061A 630 TRI 1 OH STOP 900S @ 061A 689 DAH 3 SILENCERS 1229A GRAY TRI HW-17 KITCHEN DOORS: EACH TO HAVE; NOT USED HW-18 KITCHEN DOORS: EACH TO HAVE NOT USED HW-19 LIQUOR STORAGE DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 18 of 22 HW-20 ADMIN/WORK AREA DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 KEY PADLOCK E2031BLL626 626 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 626 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616-FC-SPA @ 028A 689 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616-FC-AF86 @ 027A 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM HW-21 ELECTRICAL DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 STOREROOM LOCK C880T LCC KNURLED 626 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 626 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616FC-AF86 689 DAH 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM HW-22 EXTERIOR ELECTRICAL DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-23 HOUSEKEEPING / LAUNDRY / MECHANICAL DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5004 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 UTILITY CARD LOCK QUANTUM MT RFID CONT. 626 SAF 1 CLOSER 8616FC-AF86 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM HW-24 INTERIOR DOOR: EAC H TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-25 EXTERIOR DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-26 LINEN STORAGE DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: EXISTING TO REMAIN HW-27 ENGINEER./BOH CORRIDOR / HOUSEKEEPING / GUEST LAUNDRY DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 UTILITY CARD LOCK QUANTUM MT RFID CONT. 626 SAF 1 CLOSER 8616FC-AF86 (SPA @ 056A) 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 19 of 22 HW-28 EXTERIOR BOH SERVICE CORRIDOR/ STAIR VESTIBULE DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-29 JANITOR DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 STOREROOM LOCK C880T LCC 626 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 626 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616-FC AF86 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 3 SILENCERS 1229A GRAY TRI HW-30 RESTROOMS DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 PRIVACY SET C840 LCC 626 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616-FC AF86 DA 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM HW-31 BREAKROOM DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 PASSAGE SET C810 LCC 626 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616-FC AF86 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM HW-32 MECHANICAL EXTERIOR DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 2 CONT. HINGES FM** 628 BOM 2 FLUSH BOLTS 3917ET 626 TRI 1 STOREROOM LOCK C880T LCC 626 DAH 1 LOCK GUARD PLP111 630 DON JO 1 CLOSER 8616-S-DST 689 DAH 1 OH STOP 900H 689 DAH 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM 1 PC SEAL S44D @ ASTRAGAL D PEM 2 DOOR BOTTOMS 223ANB A PEM 1 THRESHOLD 2005AT-FHSL14200 A PEM 1 DRIP CAP 346C C PEM WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 20 of 22 HW-33 BANQUET STORAGE DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 4.5 652 BOM 1 FLUSH BOLTS 3917 626 TRI 1 DUST PROOF STRIKE 3910 626 TRI 1 STOREROOM LOCK C880T LCC 626 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 626 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616-ISH 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATES 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 2 SILENCERS 1229A GRY TRI HW-34 POOL EQUIPMENT DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5002 4.5 X 4.5 630 BOM 1 STOREROOM LOCK C880T LCC 626 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 626 DAH 1 CLOSER STA8616-FC AR 689 DAH 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM 1 DOOR BOTTOM 216AV A PEM 1 THREHOLD 1715AK-FHSL14200 A PEM HW-35 CROSS CORRIDOR DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-36 POOL GATES GATES: EACH TO HAVE: 1 EXIT DEVICE 9300-01 630 DAH NOTE: DRILL WEEP HOLES IN MAIN BAR FOR MOISTURE ALL OTHER HARDWARE BY GATE MANUFACTURER HW-37 DUMPSTER STORAGE GATES: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-38 INTERIOR STAIRS DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-39 STORAGE/LINEN DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES LB5000 4.5 X 45 652 BOM 1 STOREROOM LOCK C880T LCC 626 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 626 DAH 1 CLOSER 8616-FC AF86 689 DAH 1 KICK PLATE 8 X 2 LDW .050 B4E 630 TRI 1 WALL STOP 1270W 630 TRI 1 SET SEALS S88D D PEM WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 21 of 22 HW-41 IDF DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-42 ELEVATOR LOBBY DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: NOT USED HW-43 MISC. 1 KEY CABINET 201809003 MMF HW-44 GUESTROOM SYSTEM FRONT DESK EQUIPMENT COMPLETE SYSTEM 6000 SAF GUEST CARDS SAF 2 DAY TRAINING TRAIN – (2 DAYS TRAINING ON SITE) SAF 4 GUEST CARD LOCK QUANTUM MT RFID BLE READY CONT. SAF HW-AL-1 ALUMINUM ENTRY SLIDING DOORS DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 1 REMOTE READER RCU BLE READY X 32280 POWER SUPPLY 630 SAF 1 INTERCOM SYSTEM LEM-1DLS ( 1EA. LEM-1DL, 1 EA. LE-D AND POWER SUPPLY)AIP NOTE: REMAINDER OF HARDWARE BY SLIDING DOOR MFG. HW-AL-2 VESTIBULE SLIDING DOOR DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: NOTE: ALL HARDWARE BY SLIDING DOOR MFG. HW-AL-3 EXTERIOR REMOTE ENTRY DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 1 CONT. HINGE BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 EXIT DEVICE 9300-01 630 DAH 1 CARD EXIT TRIM MT RFID BLE READY CONT 626 SAF 1 OH STOP 1000SL 630 ABH 1 PULL BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 CLOSER BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 SET SEAL BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 DOOR BOTTOMS BY DOOR/RAME MFG. 1 THRESHOLD BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. NOTE; DOOR MUST BE MIN. 5” WIDE STILE ALUMINUM DOOR. HW-AL-4 POOL ENTRY DOOR: EACH TO HAVE: 1 CONT. HINGE BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 SET PUSH PULLS BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 DEADLOCK MS1850S BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 2 CYLINDERS 97T 626 DAH 2 PERM. CORES 77 626 DAH 1 CLOSER BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 MAGNETIC LOCK EML310 BA DP TS 628 DAH 1 FLOOR STOP 1214 626 TRI 2 REMOTE READERS RCU BLE READY X (1) 32280 POWER SUPPLY 630 SAF NOTE: DEADLOCK TO BE ENGAGE IF POOL PERMANENTLY LOCKED WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE); SECTION 08 71 11 PAGE 22 of 22 HW-AL-5 EXTERIOR EXIT - PAIR of STOREFRONT DOORS DOORS: EACH TO HAVE: 2 CONT. HINGE BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 EXIT DEVICE CD9600-03 MLR MS 630 DAH 1 CYLINDER RIM 87T 630 DAH 2 CYLINDER MORTISE 97T 630 DAH 1 PERM. CORE 77 626 DAH 1 EXIT DEVICE CD9600-01 MLR MS 630 DAH 2 OH STOP 1000SL 630 ABH 2 PULL BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 2 CLOSER BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 SET SEAL BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 2 DOOR BOTTOMS BY DOOR/RAME MFG. 1 THRESHOLD BY DOOR/FRAME MFG. 1 REMOTE READER RCU BLE READY X 32280 POWER SUPPLY 630 SAF END OF SECTION 087111 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 1 of 11 SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass for Interior windows, doors, storefront framing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 084113, “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. IBC: International Building Code. D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square. 1. Coated glass. 2. Insulating glass. C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 2 of 11 D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-E coatings. B. Product Certificates: For glass. C. Product Test Reports: For coated glass, insulating glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 084113 “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts“ to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 3 of 11 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope™ 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Viracon, Inc. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. 1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain reflective-coated glass from single source from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 4 of 11 the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing. C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. b. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 m/s). c. Importance Factor: 1.0. d. Exposure Category: B. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 5 of 11 D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat- strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I (clear), Quality-Q3; and with visible light transmission of not less than 91 percent[ and solar heat gain coefficient of not less than 0.87]. C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. D. Silicone-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Condition C, Quality-Q3. 1. Manufacturers: a. Viracon Inc.; an Apogee Company b. PPG Industries 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary sealants. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both. 2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 6 of 11 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; UltraGlaze SSG4000. 2.8 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Decorative Film: 3M™ Fasara™ Glass Finish SH2MA Series by 3M Architectural Markets. 1. Finish: As listed on Drawings 2. Size: Standard (1.27 m x 30 m) C. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. D. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. E. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 7 of 11 F. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). G. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.10 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 8 of 11 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 9 of 11 C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 10 of 11 D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.7 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear annealed float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. B. Glass Type GL-2: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Safety glazing required. C. Glass Type GL-3: Ultraclear fully tempered float glass. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite 2. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 3. Safety glazing required. D. Glass Type GL-5: Silicone-coated spandrel glass; heat-strengthened float glass. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon; Viraspan 2. Glass: Clear float glass. 3. Coating Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 5. Coating Location: Second surface. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.31 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.29 8. Fallout Resistance: Passes fallout-resistance test in ASTM C 1048 for an assembly of glass and adhered reinforcing material. E. Glass Type GL-4 Low-E-coated, tinted insulating glass. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Guardian, SunGuard Neutral 78/65. 2. Kind: Kind CV (coated vision glass), except that Kind CO (coated overhead glass) may be used where the lower edge of the glass is more than 6 feet (1.8 m) above the adjacent floor level or cannot be approached closer than 10 feet (3.0 m). 3. Coating: a. Color: Clear. b. Type: Pyrolytic or Sputter-coating (vacuum deposition process). c. Coating Location: Second surface. 4. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. b. Outdoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass. c. Interspace Content: Air. d. Indoor Lite: Clear tempered glass. 5. Quality Transmittance Reflectance ASHRAE U-Value Visible Light 78% Visible Light-Exterior 12% Winter Nighttime 0.31 Btu/(hr x sqft x °F) Solar Energy 55% Visible Light-Interior 13% Summer Daytime 0.27 Btu/(hr x sqft x °F) Ultra-Violet* 39% Solar Energy 18% 6. Shading Coefficient 0.71 7. Relative Heat Gain 147 Btu/hr x sqft WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GLAZING; SECTION 08 80 00 PAGE 11 of 11 8. Solar Factor (SHGC) 0.62 9. LSG 1.26 10. Safety glazing required. END OF SECTION 088000 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill MIRRORS; SECTION 08 83 00 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors for dressing rooms. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision lites. 2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details. C. Samples: For each type of the following: 1. Mirrors: 12 inches (300 mm) square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2. Mirror Clips: Full size. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror. C. Preconstruction Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill MIRRORS; SECTION 08 83 00 PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing. 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of mirror mastic products and mirror backing matching those submitted. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS A. Manufacturers: 1. Lenoir Mirror Company WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill MIRRORS; SECTION 08 83 00 PAGE 3 of 6 2. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. 3. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. B. Source Limitations for Glass Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer. C. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process. D. Tempered Glass Mirrors: Mirror Glazing Quality for blemish requirements and complying with ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied; clear. 1. Nominal Thickness: 3.0 mm. 2.2 AUXILIARY A. Specialty Mirror: Light Fixture D127 Backlit Mirror. 1. Basis of Design: “Silhouette” 28” x 30”; Backlit Mirror by Electric Mirror LLC. a. Refer to Electrical for Mirror requirements and installation. b. Provide double dimming capability per mirror unit, typical. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 1. Manufacturers: a. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. b. Liquid Nails Adhesive 2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Aluminum J-Channels for Mirrors: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges of mirrors in a single piece. 1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch (9.5 and 22 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch (1.0 mm). a. Manufacturers: 1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 2. Finish: Clear bright anodized. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill MIRRORS; SECTION 08 83 00 PAGE 4 of 6 B. Mirror Clips: E-Z Mount Mirror Clip. 1. Manufacturers: a. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 2. Finish: Clear bright anodized. C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield, expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: [Flat polished; Mirror to Mirror panel] [Rounded polished; Mirror]. 1. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers with mirror mastic. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual," "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill MIRRORS; SECTION 08 83 00 PAGE 5 of 6 B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. Install mirrors with mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 1. Aluminum J-Channels for Mirrors: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) long at bottom channel. 2. Aluminum L-Channels and Cleat for Glassless Mirrors: Fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088300 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill MIRRORS; SECTION 08 83 00 PAGE 6 of 6 DIVISION 9 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GYPSUM BOARD; SECTION 09 29 00 PAGE 1 of 9 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Texture finishes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GYPSUM BOARD; SECTION 09 29 00 PAGE 2 of 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products b. National Gypsum Company c. United States Gypsum Company 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling]. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products b. National Gypsum Company c. United States Gypsum Company 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products b. National Gypsum Company c. United States Gypsum Company 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD A. Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. With fiberglass mat laminated to both sides. Specifically designed for interior use. 1. Manufacturers: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GYPSUM BOARD; SECTION 09 29 00 PAGE 3 of 9 a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products b. National Gypsum Company c. United States Gypsum Company 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), abuse resistant. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Manufacturers: a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products, Dens Glass b. National Gypsum Company 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Fry Reglet Corporation b. Pittcon Industries 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GYPSUM BOARD; SECTION 09 29 00 PAGE 4 of 9 C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. Specified Technologies, Inc. c. United States Gypsum Company F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." 2.9 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GYPSUM BOARD; SECTION 09 29 00 PAGE 5 of 9 1. Manufacturers: a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products b. National Gypsum Company c. United States Gypsum Company 2. Texture: Light spatter. C. Non-Aggregate Finish: Premixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1. Manufacturers: a. National Gypsum Company b. United States Gypsum Company 2. Texture: Orange peel or Spatter knock-down. D. Acoustical Finish: Water-based, chemical-setting or drying-type, job-mixed texture finish for spray application. 1. Manufacturers: a. International Cellulose Corp. b. United States Gypsum Company 2. Application Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 4. NRC: 0.55 according to ASTM C 423. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GYPSUM BOARD; SECTION 09 29 00 PAGE 6 of 9 D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels [vertically (parallel to framing)] [horizontally (perpendicular to framing)] unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GYPSUM BOARD; SECTION 09 29 00 PAGE 7 of 9 3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges where indicated. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for other finishes. 3. Level 3: Where indicated at back of house areas. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill GYPSUM BOARD; SECTION 09 29 00 PAGE 8 of 9 a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Quarry tile. 3. Porcelain tile. 4. Glazed wall tile. 5. Crack isolation membrane. 6. Metal edge strips. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. D. Samples for Verification: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 10 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of product. D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products[ and certified porcelain tile]. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification. 2. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of floor tile installation. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 10 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 1. Crack isolation membrane. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements]. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Tile Type: Factory-mounted glazed ceramic mosaic tile. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation b. Crossville, Inc. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 10 c. Daltile 2. Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain. 3. Certification: Porcelain tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 4. Module Size: As Indicated on Drawings 5. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 6. Surface: Smooth, without and Slip resistant, with abrasive admixture. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Finish: As Indicated on Drawings 9. Tile Color and Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 10. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 11. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm) b. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm). c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap, use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. d. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch (12.7 to 6.4 mm) across nominal 4-inch (100-mm) dimension. B. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed square-edged quarry tile. 1. Manufacturers: a. Daltile 2. Face Size: 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm). 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 4. Wearing Surface: Abrasive aggregate embedded in surface. 5. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 6. Finish: As Indicated on Drawings 7. Tile Color and Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings. 8. Grout Color: As Indicated on Drawings. 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base: Coved face size 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm). b. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose. C. Ceramic Tile Type: Unglazed porcelain tile. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation b. Crossville, Inc. c. Daltile 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: As Indicated on Drawings 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 6. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 10 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base Cap: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. b. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch (12.7 to 6.4 mm) across nominal 4-inch (100-mm) dimension. D. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed porcelain tile. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation b. Crossville, Inc. c. Daltile 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: As Indicated on Drawings 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 6. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base Cap: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. b. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch (12.7 to 6.4 mm) across nominal 4-inch (100-mm) dimension. 2.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Manufacturers: a. Laticrete International, Inc.; HYDRO BAN® b. MAPEI Corporation c. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.; Triple Flex™ Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane C. Latex-Portland Cement Crack-Resistant Mortar: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex additive. 1. Manufacturers: a. C-Cure b. MAPEI Corporation c. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.; WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 10 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.11. 1. Manufacturers: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company b. Laticrete International, Inc c. MAPEI Corporation d. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin liquid-latex additive at Project site. B. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company b. Laticrete International, Inc c. MAPEI Corporation d. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F (60 and 100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated. B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company b. Laticrete International, Inc c. MAPEI Corporation d. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F (60 and 100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. 1. Manufacturers: a. Blanke Corporation b. Schluter Systems L.P WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 10 C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. D. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Manufacturers: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company b. Custom Building Products c. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 10 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch. G. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. H. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 9 of 10 B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F125-Full, except where partial coverage is indicated; thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Varies; As Indicated on Drawings. b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: High-performance sanded grout in Bathrooms; Water-cleanable epoxy grout in Kitchen. B. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F125-Full; thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Unglazed porcelain tile. b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: High-performance sanded grout. C. Interior Floor Installations, Wood Subfloor: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CERAMIC TILING; SECTION 09 30 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 10 of 10 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F150 or TCNA F160; thinset mortar on exterior-glue plywood. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Plank - Porcelain tile. b. Thinset Mortar: [EGP (exterior glue plywood) latex-portland cement] or [Improved modified dry-set] mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. D. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Unglazed porcelain tile. b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: High-performance unsanded grout. 2. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed ceramic mosaic tile. b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. E. Bathtub/Shower Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA B412; water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Unglazed porcelain tile. b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 2. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA B419; thinset mortar on coated glass-mat, water- resistant gypsum backer board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed ceramic mosaic tile. b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. END OF SECTION 093013 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 093033 - STONE TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dimension stone tile. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Waterproof membrane for thinset applications. 4. Metal edge strips. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in stone tile surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Dimension Stone Tile: Modular stone units less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width. E. Polished Finish: Smooth surface that produces sharp, mirrorlike reflections. Reflected images of overhead fluorescent tubes have straight lines without visible distortion when viewed at arm's length. F. Honed Finish: Smooth, nonreflective surface similar to that produced by grinding with a 400- to 1200-grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) when faces are tested for flatness with a 24-inch (610-mm) straightedge. G. Sand-Rubbed Finish: Uniform, fine-textured surface similar to that produced by grinding with a 40-grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) when faces are tested for flatness with a 24-inch (610-mm) straightedge. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 10 H. Thermal Finish: Uniform, coarse-textured surface produced by thermal shock; with a gap not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm) when faces are tested for flatness with a 24-inch (610-mm) straightedge. I. Natural-Cleft Finish: Uneven surface produced by splitting stone along a natural cleavage plane; without visible tool marks and with a gap not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm) when faces are tested for flatness with a 24-inch (610-mm) straightedge. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence stone tile installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. B. Install stone tile and accessories only after other finishing operations, including painting, are completed. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of stone tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in substrates and finished stone tile surfaces. C. Samples for Verification: 1. 12-inch by 12-inch units of each type of stone tile in each finish required. 2. Assembled Samples with grouted joints for each type of stone tile and for each finish required, at least 36 inches (900 mm) square and mounted on a rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color(s) approved for completed Work. 3. Range Samples consisting of at least three full-size units of each type of stone tile, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics expected. Range Samples establish the standard by which individual stone tiles are judged. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For dimension stone tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 10 1. Dimension Stone Tile: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or approved by stone manufacturer. 2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of stone wall tile installation. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. B. Store stone tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install stone tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone Tile: Obtain each stone product type from single source from single producer. 1. For each stone product type, provide one stone variety. 2. Where two or more stone product types are identical, except for size or finish, provide same variety for each type. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 10 3. Where threshold types are identical to stone tile types, except for size or finish, provide same variety. 4. Obtain each variety of stone from same location in a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2.2 STONE PRODUCTS A. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide those indicated on Drawings. B. Provide stone products that are free of defects impairing their function for use indicated, including cracks, seams, and starts. C. Pattern Orientation: For stone varieties with a directional pattern, provide tile with pattern, as Indicated on Drawings. A. Stone Tile Type: 1. Stone Type: Quartz-based stone, complying with ASTM C 616/C 616M, Classification II, Quartzitic Sandstone. 2. Varieties a. Iron Mountain; Gore Range, Colorado 3. Sources: a. Pine’s Stone Company; Carbondale CO b. Tribble Stone; Boulder CO 4. Cut: Fleuri. 5. Finish: Honed; Ashlar Rough Tooled and as indicated. 6. Edges: Square; Hand Dressed 7. Module Size: 12 by 24 inches and Varies; as indicated. 8. Nominal Tile Thickness: 3/8 inch (10 mm) 9. Joint Width: Hand tight. B. Stone Threshold Type: 1. Stone Type: Quartz-based stone, complying with ASTM C 616/C 616M, Classification II, Quartzitic Sandstone. 2. Varieties a. Iron Mountain; Gore Range, Colorado 3. Sources: a. Pine’s Stone Company; Carbondale CO b. Tribble Stone; Boulder CO 4. Cut: Fleuri. 5. Finish: Honed; Ashlar Rough Tooled and as indicated. 6. Edges: Square; Hand Dressed 7. Nominal Threshold Thickness: 3/8 inch (10 mm). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 10 2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, Type A, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Manufacturers: a. C Cure b. FinPan, Inc c. United States Gypsum Company; Durock® 2. Thickness: As indicated. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: a. Laticrete International, Inc. b. MAPEI Corporation 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene- butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site. 4. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. B. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: a. Laticrete International, Inc. b. MAPEI Corporation 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated. B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6. 1. Manufacturers: a. Laticrete International, Inc.; 1500 Sanded Grout b. MAPEI Corporation; Keracolor S, Sanded 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. A. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match stone tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. 1. Manufacturers: a. Schulter Systems LP WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 10 B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming stone tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by stone tile producers and grout manufacturers. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Thickness of Stone Tiles with Honed Finish: Do not vary from specified thickness by more than plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). B. Joint Surfaces: Except for specified beveled or eased edges if any, dress joint surfaces square for full depth of stone tile. C. Backs of Tiles: Gage units by dressing backs of tiles smooth and flat. When tested with a 24- inch (600-mm) straightedge, gap shall not exceed 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 1. Natural-cleft stone need not be gaged if gap does not exceed 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) when tested with a 24-inch (610-mm) straightedge on backs of units. 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where stone tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting stone tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind stone tile has been completed. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in stone tile substrates are coordinated with stone tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 10 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for stone tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar with trowelable patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Lay out stone tile patterns by marking joint lines on substrates to verify joint placement at edges, corners, doors, and other critical elements. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when layout will be done. 2. Obtain Architect's approval of layout before starting stone tile installation. D. Lay out stone tiles on substrates or on an adjacent surface to establish placement of individual stone tiles for balance of color and pattern variations. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when layout will be done. 2. Architect may relocate specific stone tiles with other stone tiles of same type and will determine final location of each stone tile within indicated patterns. 3. Identify each stone tile with a temporary number marked on face of stone tile that corresponds with an identical number marked on a layout drawing, and obtain Architect's approval before starting stone tile installation. 3.3 STONE TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in stone tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods specified in stone tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Exterior stone tile floors. b. Stone tile floors in wet areas. c. Stone tile floors consisting of stone tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. B. Wipe backs of stone tiles with a damp cloth to remove dirt and dust before units are installed. C. Extend stone tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stone tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of stone tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit stone tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap stone tile. E. Finish cut stone tile edges that will not be concealed by other construction by grinding and honing cut surfaces and easing edges to match factory-fabricated edges unless otherwise indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 10 F. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. G. Jointing Pattern: Lay stone tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out stone tile work and center stone tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out stone tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where adjoining stone tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 2. Where stone tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining stone tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. H. Lay out stone tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I. Match stone tiles within each space by selecting tiles to achieve uniformity of color and pattern. Reject or relocate stone tiles that do not match color and pattern of adjacent tiles. J. Mix stone tiles to achieve a uniformly random distribution of color shadings and patterns. K. Pattern Orientation: For stone varieties with directional pattern, orient pattern as indicated by Architect. L. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated. 3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical joints, external corners, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8 ft. (3 mm in 2.4 m). B. Variation in Level: For horizontal joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 ft. (3 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm). C. Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 ft. (3 mm in 3 m) from level or slope indicated when tested with a 10-ft. (3-m) straightedge. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed the following differences between faces of adjacent units as measured from a straightedge parallel to stone tiled surface: 1. Units with Polished Faces: 1/64 inch (0.4 mm). 2. Units with Honed Faces: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Units with Sand-Rubbed Faces: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 4. Units with Thermal-Finished Faces: Depth of thermal finish or 3/16 inch (5 mm), whichever is less. 5. Units with Natural-Cleft Faces: Depth of natural-cleft finish or 3/16 inch (5 mm), whichever is less. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 9 of 10 E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. F. Hand-Tight Joints: Do not exceed 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining stone tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean stone tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from stone tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from stone tile according to stone tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by stone tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of stone tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and acceptable to stone tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. C. Apply sealer to cleaned stone tile flooring according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed stone tile floors with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by stone tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed stone tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from stone tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from stone tile surfaces. 3.8 INTERIOR STONE TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete: 1. Stone Tile Installation: TCNA W222 STONE and ANSI A108.1A; one-coat cement mortar bed (thickset) on metal lath. a. Stone Tile Type: b. Bond Coat for Wet-Set Method: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: Improved modified dry-set mortar or Water- cleanable, tile-setting epoxy. d. Grout: High-performance unsanded or Water-cleanable epoxy grout. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE TILING; SECTION 09 30 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 10 of 10 B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Stone Tile Installation: TCNA W244 STONE; thinset mortar or water-cleanable, tile- setting epoxy on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board. a. Stone Tile Type: b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: High-performance unsanded or Water-cleanable epoxy grout. END OF SECTION 093033 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 095116 – WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below: 1. Acoustical Panels: Set of[6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color. 3. Clips: Full-size hold-down clips. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems. 1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension-system members. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing. 5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Diffusers. c. Grilles. d. Speakers. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. g. Perimeter moldings. 7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to acoustical panels. 8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:48). B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES. E. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.3 SOUND-ABSORBING WOOD CEILING UNITS A. Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Panel: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of Linear Wood Strips. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide WoodwrightTM 300C – Linear Plank by Hunter Douglas Architectural or equal by one of the following: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 a. 9Wood b. Norton Wood Ceiling c. Rulon International 2. Panel Shape: Plank; as indicated on Drawings. 3. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard suspension system with stiffening, Curved Torsion Spring Panel Ceiling System, secured to substrate. 4. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard 5. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 6. Reveals between Panels: Closed Joint; Butt; 7. Facing Material: Wood – Red Oak - Stained 8. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of 0.50 to 0.90 according to ASTM C 423. 9. Interior Areas: For interior ceiling areas, the Linear, Open Style shall be a 4-1/2" (114mm) module, having wood strips 5/8" thick x 1 1/2" tall, and having a 3/4" (19mm) reveal with a factory-installed fiber felt spacer between the wood strips. The Open Style fiber felt spacer is provided in a standard black color. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Hunter Douglas Architectural B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C 635/C 635M. C. Narrow-Face, Single-Web, Extruded-Aluminum Suspension System: Main and cross runners formed from extruded aluminum to produce structural members with 9/16-inch- (15-mm-) wide faces. 1. Location: Lobby 2. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 3. Face Design: Screw-slot profile. 4. Face Finish: Black. 5. Reveal Finish: Black. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 4. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. C. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 D. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1- mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts. E. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Fry Reglet Corporation B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. C. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements. 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M, and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 9. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 5. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated; space according to panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. a. Hold-Down Clips: Space 48 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross runners. 6. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts according to requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative. B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Periodic inspection during the installation of suspended ceiling grids according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages and when installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion, but no panels have been installed. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements. 1. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf (890 N) of tension; it will also select one of every two postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf (1957 N) of tension. 2. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 D. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers, anchors, and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical tiles for interior ceilings. 2. Fully concealed, direct-hung, suspension systems. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below: 1. Acoustical Tiles: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Concealed Suspension-System Members: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Sample of each type. 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each type and color. 4. Seismic Clips: Full size. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension-system members. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing. 5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 10 b. Diffusers. c. Grilles. d. Speakers. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. g. Perimeter moldings. 7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components adjacent to acoustical tiles. 8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot (1:96). B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system[ and anchor and fastener type], from ICC-ES. E. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 10 B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: 1. Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and its suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Directly Attached Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems. B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES - GENERAL / OFFICE A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation 3. United States Gypsum Company WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 10 B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. C. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated tiles as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. 2. Pattern: C E (perforated, small holes and lightly textured) 3. Fire Resistance: Class A D. Color: White. E. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.83. F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35. G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.50. H. Edge/Joint Detail: Tegular. I. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. K. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274, or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL TILES - KITCHEN / BACK OF HOUSE A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation 3. United States Gypsum Company B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. C. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated tiles as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type XX, Wet-formed ceramic and mineral fiber composite; Scrubbable factory-applied plastic paint finish. 2. Pattern: G (Smooth) 3. Fire Resistance: Class A D. Color: White. E. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.88. F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 40. G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): N/A. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 10 H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square I. Thickness: 15/16 inch. J. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches. K. Antimicrobial Treatment: Ceramaguard panels inherently inhibit the growth of mold and mildew. L. Humidity/Sag Resistance: HumiGuard® Max ceiling panels maintain maximum humidity and sag resistance, including outdoor applications. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. United States Gypsum Company B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, fully concealed, metal suspension system and accessories of type, structural classification, and finish indicated that complies with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C 635/C 635M. C. Direct-Hung, Double-Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and capped with cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 (Z90) coating designation. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. 2. Access: Upward and end pivoted, with initial access openings of size indicated below and located throughout ceiling within each module formed by main and cross runners, with additional access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles. a. Initial Access Opening: In each module, 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). b. System depth: 15/16” 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 10 not less than [0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-)] [0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> diameter wire. C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1- mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts. 2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. United States Gypsum Company B. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements. 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 2. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Acoustical Tile Adhesive: Type recommended in writing by acoustical tile manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread. B. Staples: 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) long, divergent-point staples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 10 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Testing Substrates: Before adhesively bonding tiles to wet-placed substrates such as cast-in- place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. C. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. Install suspended acoustical tile ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 10 C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows: 1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges of tiles so tile-to-tile joints are interlocked. 1. Fit adjoining tiles to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tiles for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through ceiling. 2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tiles and moldings, spaced 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. 3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts according to requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative. B. Directly Attached Ceilings: Install bottom surface of tiles to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) and not exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) cumulatively. C. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m), non-cumulative. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Periodic inspection during the installation of suspended ceiling grids according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Acoustical tile ceiling hangers, anchors, and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 9 of 10 C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. B. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095123 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS; SECTION 09 51 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 10 of 10 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES; SECTION 09 65 13 PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient stair accessories. 3. Resilient molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. D. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES; SECTION 09 65 13 PAGE 2 of 4 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE A. Manufacturers 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company 3. Roppe Corporation, USA B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove: As indicated on the Finish Plan C. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm) and as indicated on Drawings. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and noted on the Finish Legend. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES; SECTION 09 65 13 PAGE 3 of 4 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES; SECTION 09 65 13 PAGE 4 of 4 C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT TILE FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 19 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches (230 mm) long, of each color required. D. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT TILE FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 19 PAGE 2 of 6 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT TILE FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 19 PAGE 3 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide VCT “as indicated on the Drawings, Finish Schedule”; by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company c. Mannington Mills, Inc. B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 1, solid-color tile. C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm). F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. C. Seamless-Installation Accessories: 1. Chemical-Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT TILE FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 19 PAGE 4 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT TILE FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 19 PAGE 5 of 6 B. Lay out floor planks from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. H. Seamless Installation: 1. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on flooring surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply per manufacturers standard requirements. E. Sealers and Finish Coats: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient terrazzo floor tile surfaces before applying liquid cleaners, sealers, and finish products. 1. Sealer: Apply per manufacturers standard requirements. 2. Finish: Apply one coats of liquid floor finish. F. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill RESILIENT TILE FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 19 PAGE 6 of 6 END OF SECTION 096519 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 66 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 096566 - RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber sheet flooring. 2. Sheet vinyl flooring. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for wall base and accessories installed with resilient athletic flooring. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of flooring with floor inserts for gymnasium equipment. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details and locations of the following: 1. Border tiles. 2. Floor patterns. 3. Layout, colors, widths, and dimensions of game lines and markers. 4. Locations of floor inserts for athletic equipment installed through flooring. 5. Seam locations for sheet flooring. C. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, and pattern of flooring specified, 6-inch- (150- mm-) square in size and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 1. Seam Samples: For each vinyl sheet flooring color and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For sheet vinyl flooring Installer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 66 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For resilient athletic flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sheet Flooring: Furnish full-width rolls of not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Vinyl Flooring Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed sheet vinyl flooring installations using seaming methods indicated for this Project and similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; who is acceptable to manufacturer; and whose work has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storing. B. Store materials to prevent deterioration. 1. Store tiles on flat surfaces. 2. Store rolls upright. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Adhesively Applied Products: 1. Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive flooring 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after installation unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). 3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation. 4. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation unless manufacturer recommends longer period in writing. B. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 66 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER SHEET FLOORING A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide ECOfit / ECOsurfaces Classic by ecoreTM Commercial Flooring or equal by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Flexco; Prime Sport 2. Mondo America Inc. B. Description: Rubber athletic flooring provided as rolled goods for adhered installation. C. Material: Recycled-rubber compound, Rubber wear layer and rubber shock-absorbent layer, vulcanized together. D. Traffic-Surface Texture: Textured. E. Roll Size: Not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by longest length that is practical to minimize splicing during installation. F. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). G. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 WOVEN VINYL SHEET FLOORING A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide Bkb Flooring and Botanic Flooring, by BOLON or equal by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Unnatural Flooring B. Description: Woven vinyl flooring made from 97%vinyl, 2% polyester, 1% fiberglass. 1. Classification: CSTB; U3SP3 2. Fire Rating: Class B or C Fire Resistant C. Vinyl Flooring with Backing: EN429. 1. Type (Binder Content): Type I, minimum binder content of 90 percent. 2. Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade 1. 3. Overall Thickness: Thickness with backing, 3mm. 4. Interlayer Material: None. D. Seaming Method: Woven; Chemically bonded. E. Traffic-Surface Texture: Textured. F. Roll Size: Not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by longest length that is practical to minimize splicing during installation. G. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 66 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by flooring manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of flooring. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F 710. Proceed with installation only if pH readings are not less than 7.0 and not greater than 8.5. 3. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m), and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in writing. 1. Do not install flooring until it is the same temperature as space where it is to be installed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 66 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 FLOORING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface. C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings unless otherwise indicated. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating subfloor markings on flooring. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 3.4 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting. B. Lay out sheet flooring as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. 4. Locate seams according to approved Shop Drawings. C. Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. D. Vinyl Sheet Flooring Seams: Prepare and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces. 1. Chemically Bonded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 693. Seal seams to prevent openings from forming between cut edges and to prevent penetration of dirt, liquids, and other substances into seams. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from flooring surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum flooring thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop flooring to remove marks and soil after time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING; SECTION 09 65 66 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 B. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring. END OF SECTION 096566 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TILE CARPETING; SECTION 096813 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories"for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 3. Section 096816 "Sheet Carpeting" for carpet roll goods. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TILE CARPETING; SECTION 096813 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard." 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TILE CARPETING; SECTION 096813 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination. g. <Insert failure characteristic>. 3. Warranty Period: [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE CPT-1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Interface, LLC 2. Milliken & Company 3. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and as listed in the Finish Legend. C. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings D. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6. E. Fiber Type: Mannington Quantum Nylon F. Pile Characteristic: Cut-and-loop pile. G. Density: 6,857 oz./cu. yd. (g/cu. cm). H. Pile Thickness: 0.084 inches. I. Stitches: 7.6 stitches per inch (mm). J. Gage: 5/64 ends per inch (mm). K. Surface Pile Weight: 16 oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. m). L. Primary Backing/ Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard 100% Synthetic. M. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard; Infinity Modular Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Polymer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TILE CARPETING; SECTION 096813 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 N. Size: 24 inches x 24 inches O. Applied Treatments: 1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment. 2. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment that protects carpet tiles as follows: a. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174. P. Performance Characteristics: 1. Appearance Retention Rating: Moderate traffic, 2.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253. 3. Delamination: Not less than 3.5 lbf/in. (0.6 N/mm) according to ASTM D 3936 4. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement. 5. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.30 according to ASTM C 423. 7. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units) according to AATCC 16, Option E. 8. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 1.8 kV according to AATCC 134. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TILE CARPETING; SECTION 096813 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft. (304.8 sq. m), and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. D. Wood Subfloors: Verify the following: 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Section 061600 "Sheathing." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. D. Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer; Partial glue down; install periodic tiles with releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive. C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings or as recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TILE CARPETING; SECTION 096813 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096813 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SHEET CARPETING; SECTION 09 68 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tufted carpet. 2. Carpet cushion. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 2. Section 096813 "Tile Carpeting" for modular carpet tiles. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics and durability. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: For carpet installation, showing the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclose walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 4. Seam locations, types, and methods. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 8. Pile direction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SHEET CARPETING; SECTION 09 68 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 9. Types, colors, and locations of insets and borders. 10. Types, colors, and locations of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 11. Transition details to other flooring materials. 12. Type of carpet cushion. C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. 3. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Sample. 4. Carpet Seam: 6-inch (150-mm) Sample. 5. Mitered Carpet-Border Seam: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment. D. Product Schedule: For carpet and carpet cushion. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Sustainable Product Certification: Provide ANSI/NSF 140 certification for carpet products. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet and carpet cushion, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and carpet cushion. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SHEET CARPETING; SECTION 09 68 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard." B. Deliver carpet in original mill protective covering with mill register numbers and tags attached. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet and carpet cushion until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. More than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Loss of tuft bind strength. c. Excess static discharge. d. Delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty includes removal and replacement of carpet and accessories required by replacement of carpet cushion. 2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SHEET CARPETING; SECTION 09 68 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. 4. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TUFTED CARPET A. Manufacturers: 1. Interface, LLC 2. Milliken & Company 3. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company B. Color: As Indicated on the Drawing Finish Legend C. Pattern: As Indicated on the Drawing Finish Legend D. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6. E. Fiber Type: “Eco Solution Q® Nylon”. F. Pile Characteristic: Multilevel-loop pile. G. Density: 6042 oz./cu. yd. (g/cu. cm). H. Pile Thickness: 0.143 inches (mm) for finished carpet according to ASTM D 6859. I. Stitches: 9 stitches per inch (mm). J. Gage: 1/10 gage in ends per inch (mm). K. Face Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. m). L. Primary Backing: Woven, polypropylene or polyester; 18lb. M. Secondary Backing System: ClassicBac®. N. Roll Width: 12 feet (3.7 m). O. Applied Treatments: 1. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material; “SSP® Shaw Soil Protection”. 2. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. a. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174. P. Performance Characteristics: 1. Appearance Retention Rating: Moderate traffic, 2.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.22 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253. 3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) according to ASTM D 2646. 4. Tuft Bind: Not less than 5 lbf (22 N) according to ASTM D 1335. 5. Delamination: Not less than 3.5 lbf/in. (0.6 N/mm) according to ASTM D 3936 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SHEET CARPETING; SECTION 09 68 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.30 according to ASTM C 423. 7. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165. 8. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after [40] [60] AFU (AATCC fading units) according to AATCC 16, Option E. 9. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 2.2 CARPET CUSHION A. Manufacturers: 1. Interface, LLC 2. Milliken & Company 3. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company B. Traffic Classification: CCC Class II, heavy traffic. C. Fiber Cushion: Rubberized jute, mothproofed and sterilized. 1. Thickness: 5/16 inches (mm) plus 5 percent maximum. 2. Density: 8 lb/cu. ft. (kg/cu. m)>. D. Performance Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.22 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253. 2. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.40 according to ASTM C 423. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers. C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard." D. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. E. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with anodized finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SHEET CARPETING; SECTION 09 68 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 B. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m), and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet manufacturers. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 3.3 CARPET INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct-glue-down installation. 2. Stretch-in installation. B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written instructions and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Stretch-in Carpet Installation: Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. C. Install as indicated on Drawings. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SHEET CARPETING; SECTION 09 68 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 D. Install borders with mitered corner seams. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. F. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. G. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. H. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet cushion and adhesive manufacturers. END OF SECTION 096816 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SHEET CARPETING; SECTION 09 68 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL COVERINGS; SECTION 09 72 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 5 SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl wall covering. 2. Leather Wall Covering 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern placement, veneer matching, seams and termination points. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and finish specified, full width by 36-inch- (914-mm-) long in size. 1. Wall-Covering Sample: From same production run to be used for the Work, with specified treatments and color applied. Mark top and face of fabric. D. Product Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each wall covering, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL COVERINGS; SECTION 09 72 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 5 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the construction period. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until lighting that matches conditions intended for occupants after Project completion is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2. Fire-Growth Contribution: No flashover and heat and smoke release according to NFPA 265. 2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING VWC 2 - VWC 4 A. Manufacturers: 1. MDC 2. WOLF GORDON B. Description: Provide products in rolls from same production run and complying with the following: 1. CFFA-W-101-D for Type II, Medium-Duty products. 2. ASTM F 793 for peelable wall coverings. a. Category: II, Decorative with Medium Serviceability. C. Total Weight: 20oz/lyd 13.33oz/sqyd, excluding coatings. D. Width: 54 inches (1372 mm). E. Backing: Osnaburg fabric. 1. Fiber Content: Polyester. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL COVERINGS; SECTION 09 72 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 5 F. Repeat: Random reversible. G. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As listed on Drawings, Finish Schedule. 2.3 LEATHER WALL COVERING VWC1 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. DesignTex Inc. 2. Eykon Design Resources. 3. Studio Art 4. Wolf-Gordon. B. Description: Provide mildew-resistant, wall coverings in rolls from same production run and that comply with ASTM F 793. 1. Category: Decorative with Medium Serviceability. C. Test Responses: 1. Colorfastness to Wet and Dry Crocking: Passes AATCC 8, Grade 3, minimum. 2. Colorfastness to Light: Passes AATCC 16, Test Option 1 or 3, Grade 4, minimum, at 40 hours. D. Total Weight: 20 oz., excluding coatings. E. Width: 54-inch F. Repeat: Random. G. Applied Backing Material: Osnaburg fabric. H. Stain-Resistant Coating: I. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated on the Finish Index. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements recommended in writing by primer/sealer and wall-covering manufacturers for intended substrate. C. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. D. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL COVERINGS; SECTION 09 72 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fine sandpaper. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 WALL LINER INSTALLATION A. Install wall liner, without gaps or overlaps. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried. 3.4 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage. C. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 6 inches (150 mm) from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. Horizontal seams are not permitted. D. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL COVERINGS; SECTION 09 72 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 5 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 097200 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill EXTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 099113 PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 3. Steel and iron. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop painting pipe and tube railings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill EXTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 099113 PAGE 2 of 8 B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill EXTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 099113 PAGE 3 of 8 B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Duron, Inc. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill EXTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 099113 PAGE 4 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 6. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill EXTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 099113 PAGE 5 of 8 F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer[.] [ but not less than the following:] 1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SP 11. G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards[ and switch gear]. b. Uninsulated metal piping. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill EXTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 099113 PAGE 6 of 8 c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. <Insert mechanical items to be painted>. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System[ MPI EXT 3.1C]: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based[, MPI #3]. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3)[, MPI #161]. B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Deck Coating System[ MPI EXT 3.2B]: a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Deck coating, latex[, MPI #127]. 2. Clear Sealer System[ MPI EXT 3.2G]: a. Prime Coat: Sealer, solvent based, matching topcoat. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill EXTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 099113 PAGE 7 of 8 b. Intermediate Coat: Sealer, solvent based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors[, MPI #104]. C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex Aggregate System[ MPI EXT 4.2B]: a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, nonflat[, MPI #41]. d. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, flat[, MPI #42]. 2. High-Build Latex System[ MPI EXT 4.2K]: Dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm). a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, high build[, MPI #40]. D. Steel and Iron Substrates: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System[MPI EXT 5.1M] [MPI EXT 5.1N]: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based[ MPI #107]. b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #163]. 2. Quick-Dry Enamel System[ MPI EXT 5.1A]: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal[, MPI #76]. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #81]. E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System [MPI EXT 5.3J] [MPI EXT 5.3K]: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based[, MPI #134]. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #163]. F. Aluminum Substrates: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System[ MPI EXT 5.4G]: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum[, MPI #95]. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #163]. END OF SECTION 099113 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill EXTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 099113 PAGE 8 of 8 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 09 91 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Steel and iron. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 5. Gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications. 2. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop priming pipe and tube railings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 09 91 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 09 91 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Duron, Inc. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 09 91 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 09 91 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SP 11. G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 09 91 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 09 91 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Aggregate System MPI INT 3.1N : a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, nonflat , MPI #41 . d. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, flat , MPI #42 . 2. Concrete Stain System MPI INT 3.1K : a. First Coat: Stain, interior, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Stain, interior , MPI #58 . B. Cement Board Substrates: 1. Latex System MPI INT 3.3A : a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based , MPI #3 . b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3) , MPI #52 . C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex Aggregate System MPI INT 4.2B : a. Prime Coat: Primer for textured coating, latex, flat , as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer . b. Intermediate Coat: Intermediate coat for textured coating, latex, flat , as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer . c. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, nonflat , MPI #41 . d. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, flat , MPI #42 . D. Steel Substrates: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System over Epoxy Primer System MPI INT 5.1N : a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive MPI #101 . b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5) , MPI #153 . E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.3M : a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based , MPI #134 . b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5) , MPI #141 . WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 INTERIOR PAINTING; SECTION 09 91 23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 F. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.4F : a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum , MPI #95 . b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3) , MPI #139 . d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5) , MPI #141 . G. Wood Substrates: Wood trim Architectural woodwork Doors Windows 1. Latex over Latex Primer System MPI INT 6.3T : a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood , MPI #39 . b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3) , MPI #52 . d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4) , MPI #43 . H. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex over Latex Sealer System MPI INT 9.2A : for Guest Rooms and Offices a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior , MPI #50 . b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3) , MPI #52 . I. Gypsum Board and Glass Mat Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 9.2B : for Wet Areas a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior , MPI #50 . b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139. 1) Shermin Williams; Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Sales Number:6505- 15398 Product Number:B66W01251 2) Benjamin Moore; - Ultra Spec© EXT Flat(N447) or Satin (N448) (Note this is an exterior paint however it is the only mildew resistant MPI product they offer J. Intumescent and Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings 1. Alkyd System: ALT 1 a. Topcoat: Silicone alkyd, protective topcoat, interior, (MPI Gloss Level 3). 1) Sherwin Williams; Steel-Master 9500 2. Alkyd System: ALT 2 MPI INT 174 a. Topcoat: Solvent based, two component polyurethane, pigmented coating, protective topcoat, interior, (MPI Gloss Level 3). 1) Sherwin Williams; Acrolon 218 HS Polyurethane Semi-Gloss END OF SECTION 099123 DIVISION 10 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE; SECTION 10 14 19 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 101419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fabricated channel dimensional characters. 2. Molded-plastic dimensional character - Brand Logo 1.3 COORDINATION A. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Sample of dimensional character. 2. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. 3. Full-size Samples, if approved, will be returned to Contractor for use in the Project. D. Product Schedule: For dimensional letter signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For signs indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Include structural analysis calculations for signs indicated to comply with design loads; signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE; SECTION 10 14 19 PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design sign structure and anchorage of dimensional character sign type(s) according to structural performance requirements. B. Structural Performance: Signs and supporting elements shall withstand the effects of gravity and other loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Uniform Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Concentrated Horizontal Load: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Other Design Load: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE; SECTION 10 14 19 PAGE 3 of 6 C. Thermal Movements: For exterior fabricated channel dimensional characters, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Fabricated Channel Characters: Metal face and side returns, formed free from warp and distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally braced for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners; and as follows. 1. Manufacturers: a. APCO Graphics, Inc., Atlanta GA b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc., Nashville TN c. Balton Sign Company, Memphis TN d. Den-Ray Sign Company, Jackson TN 2. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum. 3. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character. 4. Character Height: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Character Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Finishes: a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Anodized color as selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. b. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating. 7. Mounting: Concealed, painted aluminum back bar or bracket assembly. a. Hold characters at 2-inch (51-mm) distance from wall surface. 8. Typeface: B. Molded-Plastic Characters Brand Logo: thermoformed characters having uniform faces and profiles, and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. APCO Graphics, Inc., Atlanta GA b. BSC Signs Inc. Denver CO c. Denver Sign Company, Denver CO 2. Color: Manufacturer's standard integral color process, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Typeface: 2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE; SECTION 10 14 19 PAGE 4 of 6 B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. D. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering). E. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General: a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead screws and bolts with tamper-resistant Allen-head slots unless otherwise indicated. 4. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE; SECTION 10 14 19 PAGE 5 of 6 6. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. 7. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing. B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required. 1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish to match sign-background color unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE; SECTION 10 14 19 PAGE 6 of 6 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten. 2. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in position, so that signage is correctly located and aligned. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101419 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 1 of 10 SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Panel signs. 2. Field-applied, vinyl-character signs. B. Related Requirements included in separate package: 1. Section 14 21 23.16 "Machine Room-Less Electric Traction Passenger Elevators" for code-required conveying equipment signage. 2. Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment. 3. Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment. 4. Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 5. Section 265219 "Emergency and Exit Lighting" for illuminated, self-luminous, and photoluminescent exit sign units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard. B. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers. B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 2 of 10 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Panel Signs: Full-size Sample. 2. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs: Full-size Sample of characters on glass. 3. Variable Component Materials: Full-size Sample of each base material, character (letter, number, and graphic element) in each exposed color and finish not included in Samples above. 4. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. 5. Full-size Samples, if approved, will be returned to Contractor for use in Project. E. Product Schedule: For panel signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified. F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For signs indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article 1. Include structural analysis calculations for signs indicated to comply with design loads; signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Variable Component Materials: 12 replaceable text inserts and interchangeable characters (letters, numbers, and graphic elements) of each type. 2. Tools: One set(s) of specialty tools for assembling signs and replacing variable sign components. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 3 of 10 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design sign structure and anchorage of illuminated panel sign type(s) according to structural performance requirements. B. Structural Performance: Signs and supporting elements shall withstand the effects of gravity and other loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Uniform Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Concentrated Horizontal Load: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Other Design Load: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design". E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 4 of 10 2.2 PANEL SIGNS A. Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. APCO Graphics, Inc b. Mohawk Sign Systems c. Best Sign Systems, Inc. d. Seton Identification Products 2. Solid-Sheet Sign Acrylic sheet with finish specified in "Surface Finish and Applied Graphics" Subparagraph and as follows: a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied, Flat Graphics: Applied vinyl film. c. Surface-Applied, Raised Graphics: Applied Braille. d. Etched and Filled Graphics: Sign face etched or routed to receive enamel-paint infill. e. Inset, Cutout Characters: Sign face routed to receive push-through acrylic graphics slightly projecting from the sign panel. 3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth. a. Edge Condition Bullnosed. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Rounded to radius indicated. 4. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated with concealed anchors or adhesive. 5. Surface Finish and Applied Graphics: a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized. b. Integral Stainless-Steel Finish:No. 4. c. Integral Acrylic Sheet Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. d. Painted Finish and Graphics: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied vinyl in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. e. Photo-Image Graphics: Manufacturer's standard black-and-white, 600-dpi halftone or dot-screen image. f. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating. 6. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille. 7. Flatness Tolerance: Sign shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions as indicated on Drawings and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)measured diagonally from corner to corner. 2.3 FIELD-APPLIED, VINYL-CHARACTER SIGNS A. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Sign: Pre-spaced characters die cut from 3- to 3.5-mil (0.076- to 0.089-mm) thick, weather-resistant vinyl film with release liner on the back and carrier film on the front for on-site alignment and application. 1. Manufacturers: a. APCO Graphics, Inc b. Mohawk Sign Systems c. Best Sign Systems, Inc. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 5 of 10 d. Seton Identification Products 2. Size: As scheduled. 3. Substrate: As scheduled. 4. Text and Font: As scheduled. 2.4 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. C. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering). D. Vinyl Film: UV-resistant vinyl film of nominal thickness indicated, with pressure-sensitive, permanent adhesive on back; die cut to form characters or images as indicated on Drawings and suitable for exterior applications. E. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General: a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper-resistant Allen-head slots unless otherwise indicated. 4. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly unless otherwise indicated. b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated. c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, and installed in predrilled holes. 5. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by other installers into concrete or masonry work. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 as appropriate for the substrate. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 6 of 10 1. Uses: Securing signs with imposed loads to structure. 2. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anchor. 3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer. E. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick, with adhesive on both sides. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil- canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. B. Shop- and Subsurface-Applied Vinyl: Align vinyl film in final position and apply to surface. Firmly press film from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths. C. Signs with Changeable Message Capability: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages as follows: 1. For snap-in changeable inserts beneath removable face sheet, furnish one suction or other device to assist in removing face sheet. Furnish initial changeable insert. Subsequent changeable inserts are by Owner. 2. For frame to hold changeable sign panel, fabricate frame without burrs or constrictions that inhibit function. Furnish initial sign panel. Subsequent changeable sign panels are by Owner. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 7 of 10 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated. D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 2.9 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 2. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verify that anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 8 of 10 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls according to the accessibility standard. C. Mounting Methods: 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten. 2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten. 3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten. 4. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. 5. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive. D. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs: Clean and dry substrate. Align sign characters in final position before removing release liner. Remove release liner in stages, and apply and firmly press characters into final position. Press from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths. Remove carrier film without disturbing applied vinyl film. E. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 9 of 10 C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101423 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PANEL SIGNAGE; SECTION 101423 PAGE 10 of 10 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS; SCTION 10 21 13.19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach floor-and-ceiling-anchored compartments to overhead structural system. 2. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 3. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains. 5. Show overhead support or bracing locations. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6- inch- (152-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory. D. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS; SCTION 10 21 13.19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source. 1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners. 3. Door Bumper: One bumper(s) with associated fasteners. 4. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners. 5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 2.2 SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE (SCRC) SUBSTRATE COMPARTMENTS A. Basis of Design: (SCRC) “Sierra Series” Toilet Partitions by Bobrick or equal by the one of the following manufacturers: 1. Ampco Products, LLC 2. Bradley Corporation 3. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS; SCTION 10 21 13.19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: 1. Floor and ceiling anchored; Location: Public Restrooms 2. Floor Mounted, overhead Braced; Location: Employee Lounge C. Urinal-Screen Style: Floor anchored, Post to ceiling. D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, Homogeneous-filled plastic resin panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Color and Pattern: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Pilaster Shoes: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer. 1. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster. F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters; with shoe matching that on the pilaster. G. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel. 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick stainless-steel paired, self- closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface-mounted cast-stainless-steel latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless-steel hook and rubber- tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through-bolts. 4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS; SCTION 10 21 13.19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. B. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage. C. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide shoes at posts to conceal anchorage. D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS; SCTION 10 21 13.19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 B. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when doors are in closed position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113.19 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS; SCTION 10 21 13.19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS; SECTION 102239.13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 102239.13 - FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes manually operated, glass-panel partitions located in Breakfast Buffet, RM 236 B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. STC: Sound Transmission Class. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For operable glass-panel partitions. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, numbered panel installation sequence, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 2. Glass: Units 12 inches (300 mm) square. 3. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For operable glass-panel partitions. 1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS; SECTION 102239.13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems are attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Smoke detectors. f. Access panels. 6. Plenum acoustical barriers. B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support- beam, mounting-hole template. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable glass-panel partitions, tracks, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. Include seismic capacity of partition assemblies to remain in vertical position during a seismic event and the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on analysis, testing, or experience data, according to ASCE/SEI 7. 2. Detailed description of partition anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Product Certificates: For each type of operable glass-panel partition. F. Product Test Reports: For each operable glass-panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. G. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable glass-panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Panel finish and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS; SECTION 102239.13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable glass-panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of operable glass-panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic bracing of tracks to structure above. B. Seismic Performance: Operable glass-panel partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the partition panels will remain in place without separation of any parts from the system when subjected to the seismic forces specified." C. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable glass-panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable glass-panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wood-framed panels complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS; SECTION 102239.13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 2.2 OPERABLE GLASS PANELS A. Operable Glass Panels: Wood-framed glass-panel partition system, including panels, suspension system, operators, and accessories. B. Horizontal Folding Glass Panel Partitions: Fully-glazed, top-hung stackable folding glass panel partition without floor track, with top and bottom door rails and butt-glazed dry joint between panels, and equipped with pivoting door panels where indicated. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance provide one of the following: a. DORMA USA Inc.; DORMA-GLAS Horizontal Folding Wall FSW b. Hufcor INC.; Timber Framed Glass Wall c. Ray Door; Room Dividers, Glass 2. Stacking Arrangements: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Stacking Operation: Manual. C. Panel Operation: Manually operated, individual panels. D. Rail Fittings, General: All-glass clamping fittings in types, sizes, quantities, and mounting locations recommended by manufacturer for glass door types, sizes, and operation and glass panel configurations. 1. Rail Configuration: a. Top Rail: Wood style and rail, 3.62 inches high. 1) Hardware: With manufacturer's standard top-latching bolt where indicated on Drawings. b. Bottom Rail: Wood style and rail, 3.62 inches high. 1) Hardware: With deadlock where indicated on Drawings. E. Glass and Glazing: As follows: 1. Glass: Custom acrylic panel and glass assemblies as indicated and complying with the following: a. Custom: Acrylic, 3form Varia Ecoresin; color and finish as listed on drawings. 2. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system. F. Dimensions: Fabricate operable glass-panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. 1. Panel Width: Equal widths. G. STC: Not less than 36. H. Panel Weight: 6 lb/sq. ft. (29.3 kg/sq. m) maximum. I. Pivoting Single Panel: Single- or double- acting glass panel matching partition panel material and thickness; size and swing as indicated on Drawings. J. Panel Frame 1. Thickness: Maximum 1-3/4 inches. 2. Materials: Wood: Basis of design is Oak K. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS; SECTION 102239.13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 L. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable glass-panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Floor Lock: Key actuated. M. Panel Frame Finishes: 1. Wood Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, as follows: 2.3 SEALS A. General: Provide seals that produce operable glass-panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable glass-panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable glass-panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage. 1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish. 2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish. B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels. C. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same frame material, finish, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware. 1. Manufacturer's standard method to secure storage pocket door in closed position. 2. Rim Lock: Key-operated lock cylinder, keyed to master key system, to secure storage pocket door in closed position. Include two keys per lock. B. Vertical Edge Trim: Manufacturer's standard transparent trim to protect vertical edges of glass in frameless panels. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS; SECTION 102239.13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable glass-panel partitions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable glass-panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Install operable glass-panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. F. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable glass-panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. C. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. 3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable-partition operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable glass-panel partitions. END OF SECTION 102239.13 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION; SECTION 10 26 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include fire ratings of units recessed in fire-rated walls and listings for door-protection items attached to fire-rated doors. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Corner Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include example top caps. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of handrail. B. Material Certificates: For each type of exposed plastic material. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION; SECTION 10 26 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of cover installed, but no fewer than two, 48-inch- (1200- mm-) long units. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well- ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall- and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C). a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door- protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall- and door-protection products from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION; SECTION 10 26 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 2.3 CORNER GUARDS A. Flush-Mounted, Plastic-Cover Corner Guards: Manufacturer's standard, assembly consisting of snap-on, resilient plastic cover that is flush with adjacent wall surface, installed over retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition; full wall height. 1. Manufacturers: a. Construction Specialties, Inc. b. InPro Corporation (IPC) c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products 2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.100-inch (2.5-mm) wall thickness; as follows: a. Profile: Nominal 3-inch- (75-mm-) long leg and 1/4-inch (6-mm) corner radius. b. Height: 8 feet (2.4 m). c. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum. 4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips. 5. Aluminum Cove Base: Nominal 4 inches (100 mm) high. B. Fire-Rated, Flush-Mounted, Plastic-Cover Corner Guards: Manufacturer's standard, assembly consisting of snap-on, resilient plastic cover that is flush with adjacent wall surface, installed over continuous retainer and intumescent fire barrier; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition; full wall height. 1. Manufacturers: a. Construction Specialties, Inc. b. InPro Corporation (IPC) c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products 2. Fire Rating: Same rating as wall in which corner guard is installed; UL listed and labeled according to ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079. a. L-Rating at Smoke Barriers: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft. (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at 0.30 inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures according to UL 2079. 3. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.100-inch (2.5-mm) wall thickness; as follows: a. Leg: Nominal 3 inches (75 mm). b. Corner Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm). c. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Retainer: Minimum 0.070-inch- (1.8-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum. 5. Aluminum Cove Base: Nominal 4 inches (100 mm) high. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION; SECTION 10 26 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. 2.6 FINISHES A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION; SECTION 10 26 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. B. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other accessories required for a complete installation. 1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads. 2. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches (305 mm) apart. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 102600 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION; SECTION 10 26 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES; SECTION 10 28 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Warm-air dryers. 4. Childcare accessories. 5. Under-lavatory guards. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 088300 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors. 2. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Include electrical characteristics. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES; SECTION 10 28 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. See Toilet & Bath Accessory Matrix for list of which Manufacturer's are approved for use on a specific item. 1. Preferred Manufacturers: a. Franklin Brass, Liberty Hardware Manufacturing Corp., A Masco Company b. WingIts LLC 2. Approved Manufacturers: a. American Specialties, Inc. (ASI) b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. c. Gamco, A Bobrick Company d. Hafele America Co. (HEWI) e. Preferred Bath Accessories LLC. f. Mincey Marble Manufacturing Co. g. Shower Solutions USA, Inc. h. Symmons Industries, Inc. 2.3 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser : 1. Description: Two-roll unit with sliding panel to expose other roll. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES; SECTION 10 28 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Capacity: 9- or 10-inch- (228- or 254-mm-) diameter rolls. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. 6. Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at front. C. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle : 1. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 2. Mounting: Semirecessed. a. Designed for nominal 4-inch (100-mm) wall depth. 3. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. 4. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 12 gal. (45.4 L). 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 6. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner. 7. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment and waste receptacle. D. Automatic Liquid-Soap Dispenser : 1. Description: Automatic dispenser with infrared sensor to detect presence of hands; battery powered; designed for dispensing antibacterial soap in lather form. 2. Mounting: Deck mounted on vanity. 3. Capacity: 34-fl oz (1.0-L). 4. Refill Indicator: LED indicator. 5. Low Battery Indicator: LED indicator. E. Grab Bar : 1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. F. Vendor : 1. Type: Sanitary napkin and tampon. 2. Mounting: Semirecessed. 3. Capacity: 20 napkin / 30 tampon 4. Operation: No coin (free). 5. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 6. Lockset: Tumbler type with separate lock and key for coin box. G. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit : 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover. 3. Receptacle: Removable. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). H. Seat-Cover Dispenser : 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Minimum Capacity: 250 seat covers. 3. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES; SECTION 10 28 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 I. Fold-Down Purse Shelf : 1. Description: Hinged unit with spring-loaded shelf that automatically returns to vertical position. 2. Nominal Size: 15 inches (381 mm) long by 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) wide. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). J. Mirror Unit : 1. Frame: Stainless steel, fixed tilt. a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Integral Shelf: 5 inches (127 mm) deep. 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 4. Size: As indicated on Drawings. K. Coat Hook : 1. Description: Single-prong unit. 2. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 2.4 WARM-AIR DRYERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain warm-air dryers from single source from single manufacturer. B. High-Speed Warm-Air Dryer: 1. Description: High-speed, warm-air hand dryer for rapid hand drying. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with low-profile design. 3. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with operation time of 10 to 20 seconds. 4. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Electrical Requirements: 110/120 volt, 12.5 amp, 60 Hz. 2.5 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain childcare accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Diaper-Changing Station: 1. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap. a. Engineered to support minimum of 250-lb (113-kg) static load when opened. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches (100 mm) from wall when closed. 3. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 4. Material and Finish: HDPE in manufacturer's standard color. 5. Liner Dispenser: Built in. 2.6 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Underlavatory Guard: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES; SECTION 10 28 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 1. Manufacturers: a. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. b. Truebro by IPS Corporation 2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. 2.7 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 2.8 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper- and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.9 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES; SECTION 10 28 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 102800 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TUB AND SHOWER DOORS; SECTION 10 28 19.21 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 10 28 19 - TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Frameless Shower Door with Fixed Glass Panel 2. Attachment hardware B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 50 00 (05500) - Metal Fabrications 2. Section 06 10 00 (06100) - Rough Carpentry: Blocking 3. Section 08 80 00 (08800) - Glazing: Unframed mirrors, tub and shower glass 4. Section 09 30 00 (09310) - Tiling: Coordinate installation of accessories 5. Section 10 21 13 (10165) - Toilet Compartments: Coordinate installation of accessories 6. Section 10 28 00 (10800) - Toilet Bath and Laundry Accessories 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International Publications: 1. A167 - “Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip” 2. A666 “Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar” B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ICC/ANSl A117.1-2009, “Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities” C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) II Public Accommodations 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Submit: 1. Product Data: Mark each copy to identify applicable products, characteristics, models, options and other supplemental data to clearly communicate information specific to this project. 2. Shop Drawings: For tub and shower doors and enclosures. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TUB AND SHOWER DOORS; SECTION 10 28 19.21 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in the same area. B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of tub and shower doors and enclosure as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver components to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them. B. Store all materials to prevent physical damage or wetting. C. Maintain protective covers on all units until final clean-up. D. Protection: Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during installation of work of this Section. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Work of this Section shall be jointly warrantied by the manufacturer and the installer for a period of one year after final payment. Any material or workmanship that is judged defective during this period shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Architectural Concepts 2. Belstone 3. Continental Group 4. C.R. Laurence Company (CRL) 5. Dream Line 6. Mincey Marble Manufacturing Co. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Material: 18-8 (Type 302) stainless steel alloy of at least 22 gauge. Unless shown otherwise, all exposed stainless steel to have a #4 Satin finish or Satin chrome finish where applicable with all elements of a unit to have brushing in one direction. B. Exposed surfaces to be protected with a factory applied PVC film to be left in place until final clean-up. C. Stainless steel tubing: 18 ga., Type 304, seamless welded. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TUB AND SHOWER DOORS; SECTION 10 28 19.21 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 D. Glazing: Safety glazing materials complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II, with permanently etched identification acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Provide frameless glass panels with mounting and operating hardware of types and sizes required to support imposed loads. F. Fasteners, screws, and bolts: Hot dip galvanized. Expansion shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component substrate. G. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement. 2.03 FRAMELESS SLIDING SHOWER DOOR WITH ONE FIXED GLASS PANEL (461) A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. C.R. Laurence Company (CRL) 2. Complete System: Architectural Concepts; Barn Shower Door 3. Complete System: Belstone; Bartlett Barn Shower Door 4. Complete System: Continental Group; Glass Barn Door 5. Complete System: Dream Line; Enigma-X 6. Complete System: Mincey Marble Manufacturing Co.; Arezzo Bypass Barn Door B. Materials: 1. Glass: a. Clear, tempered, polished edges. b. Size: Refer to Drawings for width and height. 2. U Channels for Fixed Panel 3. Sliding Barn Door Hardware: Exposed Stainless Steel Track with Valances a. Hafele; Flatec IV with Hollow Stainless Steel Track or equal 4. Back to Back Pull Handles (D): Tubular brass pull handle, ¾” diameter, 1.5 mil thick, standard plastic washers included to protect against glass-to-metal contact. a. Pull Handles: 6-1/4” center-to-center hole spacing. b. Finish: Satin c. “Model Number BM6X6CH”; C.R. Laurence Company or equal 5. Fasteners: All fasteners to be by the manufacturer. 6. Adhesives: Type as per manufacturer’s recommendations. 7. Sealant: Silicone type as per manufacturer’s recommendations 8. Miscellaneous: Optional Soft Close System 2.04 FINISHES A. Exposed heads of fasteners shall match finish of accessory. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes. B. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surface without scratches or dents. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TUB AND SHOWER DOORS; SECTION 10 28 19.21 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 C. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. D. Hot dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to job site and in appropriate time for building-in. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. B. Before starting work, notify Owner’s Representative in writing of any conflicts detrimental to installation or operation of units. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels, and anchor securely in place. D. Fasten components securely in place, with provisions for thermal movement. Install with concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. E. Install components to drain and return water to tub or shower. F. Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. G. Verify with Owner’s Representative exact location of accessories. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible. C. Install true, plumb, and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction. 1. Wood blocking shall be provided at grab bars and fold down shower seats, and as shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES; SECTION 10 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 10 31 00 - MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured Fireplaces. 2. All Required Accessories B. Related Sections: 1. 10 14 23 Panel Signage: for Fire Pit Emergency Shut Off and Warning Plaque signage. 2. Division 23 Sections: for Gas pipe to fire pit and connection to fire pit burner. 3. Division 26 Sections: Wall switch connected to gas log electronic ignition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit: 1. Submit product data, mark each copy to identify applicable products, characteristics, models, options and other supplemental data to clearly communicate information specific to this project. 2. Shop Drawings and Samples: Submit copies of Shop Drawings of all items specified herein to Architect for approval. Obtain approval of drawings prior to proceeding with manufacturing. Shop Drawings shall indicate: elevations; details; location in the building of each item; conditions at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials; typical and special details of construction; methods of assembling sections; locations and installations requirements for hardware; size, shape, and thickness of materials; and joints and connections. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years of experience in installation of fireplace units of type, quantity, and installation methods similar to work of this Section. B. All materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. C. Comply with the fire-resistance ratings as indicated and as required by governing authority and codes. Provide materials, accessories, and application procedures which have been listed by UL. D. Verify that components and proposed installation comply with local and state requirements for both gas and wood burning fireplaces. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES; SECTION 10 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIREPLACE A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Montigo, "C-620- ST C-View, See Through Fireplace." 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fireplaces: Provide manufactured, vented fireplace at location indicated on the Drawings. 1. Viewing Area: 216-inches wide by 60-inches high, on both sides 2. Temperature Control: Cool Pack system. 3. Fuel: Natural gas. 4. Power: 120 volts 5. Control Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Burner: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard types. B. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories as required, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Flue and End Cap: Class B vent, UL Certified. a. Size: 10 inch. b. Configuration: Horizontal termination. c. Louver: Architectural louver on exterior wall; finish and color to be selected by Architect. d. Fan: Provide in-line fan. 2. Glass: Tempered glass, 5 mm thick. 3. Temperature Control: Cool Pack system. 4. Air Intake: a. Consumption Setting: 840 cfm. b. Intake Size: Two 7 inch for total of minimum 77 sq. in. 5. Pilot Light: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Controls: Automatic timer. C. Components: Manufactured fireplace unit shall be UL-listed, and Class A rated. D. Accessories/Components: 1. Lava Rock 2. Emergency Flame Shut-Off Switch: Weatherproof maintained contact red mushroom head pushbutton switch with cover labeled “EMERGENCY SHUTOFF,” suitable for wiring in series in low-voltage gas control circuit. a. Cutler-Hammer Div. Eaton Industries, HT800 Series two-position maintained push- pull button, Catalog HT8CBRB, mounted in recessed weathertight enclosure. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES; SECTION 10 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 b. Refer to 8 APR 14 00 “Signage (Interior Signage Manual)” for sign adjacent to Emergency Shutoff Switch. 3. Custom fabricated stainless steel supports around edge of pan. 4. Custom fabricated stainless steel collar surrounding entire pan system. Refer to Drawings for size and location. 5. All other components required for complete installation. 6. Warning Plaques: Warning plaques, located on top of stone at locations as shown on Drawings, with text as follows oriented to be read from adjoining walking surfaces: a. “NOTICE: DO NOT LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED.” b. Refer to 8 APR 14 00 “Signage (Interior Signage Manual)” for warning plaques. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Contractor shall inspect site conditions to which work is to be installed. Report discrepancies to Architect in writing. B. Examine roughing-in for gas piping and electrical control wiring to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation. 1. Provide underground gas line and associated trenching and filling in compliance with Division 33 Sections or the requirements of the local natural gas utility supplier and authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements of 8 APR 11 23 - Facility Natural Gas Piping for piping inside of building. C. Verify that Fire Pit dimensions, clearances, combustion air ventilation and drainage are in accordance with manufacturer’s published directions and listing requirements of the equipment being installed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install manufactured fireplaces in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, reviewed product data, and final shop drawings. B. Make connections to burner assembly in accordance with manufacturer instructions and as follows: 1. Provide electrical connectors listed and labeled for wet locations and suitable for use without supplemental applications of electrical tape. 2. Provide corrosion-resistant gas connectors and fittings suitable for exterior use. Provide flexible connector of appropriate length to allow for maintenance access to fire pit. C. Install true, plumb, and level. When required by manufacturers instructions securely and rigidly anchor components to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES; SECTION 10 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 D. Installed gas piping, control wiring, tubing, hoses and clamps, must be hidden from view. END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill FIRE EXTINGUISHERS; SECTION 10 44 16 PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers. B. Owner-Furnished Material: Hand-carried fire extinguishers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire- protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill FIRE EXTINGUISHERS; SECTION 10 44 16 PAGE 2 of 2 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each indicated. 1. Manufacturers a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group b. Larsens Manufacturing Company c. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container: UL-rated 3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-aluminum container. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 104416 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL LOCKERS; SECTION 10 51 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 10 51 13 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Locker Units with Hinged Doors 2. Base, Top, and Filler Panels 3. Hooks, Latches, and Hardware 4. Attachment Hardware B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for attachment 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Lockers: Two-tier locker. Provide standard recessed padlock handle, number plate bases, end panels, filler panels, matching sloped top and top filler panels. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Submit: 1. Submit Shop Drawings and product data that clearly indicate locker types, sizes, configurations, layout of groups of lockers, benches, accessories, and numbering plan. 2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and actual color samples, on squares of same metal to be used for fabrication. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect locker finishes and adjacent surfaces from damage during installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. “Industrial”; Lyon Workspace Products LLC (800-433-8488) a. Color: No. BN 931 – B6 2. “Standard Lockers”; Republic Storage Systems Company (800-477-1255) a. Color: No. 89 Cork 3. “Vanguard Lockers”; Penco Products, Inc. (800-562-1000) a. Color: No. 073 Champagne WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL LOCKERS; SECTION 10 51 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 4. “Emperor Locker System”; Hadrian Manufacturing, Inc. (905-333-0300) a. Color: No. 603 Almond 2.02 LOCKER MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, Mild, stretcher-leveled cold-rolled carbon sheet steel free of buckling, scale, and surface imperfections of the following minimum thicknesses: 1. Body and Shelf: 24 Gauge 2. Doors: 16 Gauge 3. Door Frames: 16 Gauge 4. Hinges: Minimum 2" wide, full loop, tight pin type. 2.03 LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Provide each locker with metal number plate, rubber bumpers, and hat/bookshelf. 2.04 LOCKER FABRICATION A. Locker Units: Provide the following types in locations shown on the Drawings: 1. Two tier units, each locker to be 12" wide x 15" deep x 36" high. B. Bodies: Formed and flanged with stiffener ribs; electrically spot welded. C. Door Frame: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body. D. Doors: Welded inner and outer faces; channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs. Finish edges smooth. E. Hinges: Three full loop hinges. Weld securely to unit body and secure to door with no fewer than 2 factory installed fasteners that are completely concealed and tamperproof when door is closed. F. Recessed Handle and Latch: Manufacturer's standard housing to form a recess for latch lifter and locking devices; non-protruding latch lifter containing strike and eye for padlock; and automatic, pre-locking, pry-resistant latch with latching action with not less than three-point latching. Locking device supplied by Owner. G. Provide finished filler panels, end panels, continuous sloped 20-gauge metal tops and top filler panels to close off all openings, finished to match lockers. 1. Sloped tops are to be in lengths as long as practicable, but not less than four lockers. H. Provide matching 12 gage, "Z" type base, 4" high at non-recessed lockers. I. Trim: 3", 18 gauge steel matching trim for recessed lockers. J. Provide full perimeter concealed ventilation system. K. Finish edges smooth without burrs. L. Provide number plates. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL LOCKERS; SECTION 10 51 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 M. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Weld frame members together to form a rigid, one-piece structure. 1. Form locker body panels, doors, shelves and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. N. Accessible Lockers: 1. Accessible Locker to meet ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003-Side Reach Requirement: Single tier lockers shall have a hat/book shelf and coat hooks located no more than 46-inches above the finished floor. One additional shelf shall be placed near the bottom of the locker so that it is no lower than 15-inches above finished floor. 2. Apply a decal with the international symbol of accessibility to the face of the designated handicapped accessible single tier locker, refer to Drawings for location. 2.05 FINISHES A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with two coats of baked enamel, color as selected by Architect from standard colors. B. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. C. Finish all steel surfaces and accessories, except prefinished stainless-steel and chrome- plated surfaces. D. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment. E. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify bases are properly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install metal lockers complete with accessories according to manufacturer's recommendations. Install plumb, level, rigid, flush and in-line. B. Anchor lockers with appropriate anchor devices to suit materials encountered, to floor and walls. Apply fasteners through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion, using concealed fasteners. C. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. D. Install end panels, filler panels, and tops to completely close-off all openings. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL LOCKERS; SECTION 10 51 13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 E. Anchor lockers to floors and walls at intervals recommended by manufacturer but no greater than 36 inches (910 mm). Install anchors through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion, using concealed fasteners. 1. Install recess trim to recessed lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide hairline joints and concealed splice plates. 2. Install sloping top units to lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide hairline joints and concealed splice plates. 3. Install finished end panels to conceal exposed ends of non-recessed lockers. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without bending. Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly. B. Touch-up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. C. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces and polish steel and non-ferrous metal surfaces. D. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit locker use during construction. END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL STORAGE SHELVING; SECTION 10 56 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 10 56 13 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Storage Shelving 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit: 1. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, characteristics, models, options and other supplemental data to clearly communicate information specific to this project. 2. Color Chart: Each product specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal storage shelving through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver metal storage shelving palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install metal storage shelving until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is completed and dry, and ambient temperature is being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations and installation of metal storage shelving that may interfere with ceiling systems including lighting, HVAC, and sprinklers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STORAGE SHELVING A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. "Open Clip Type Shelving" - Republic Storage Systems Company (800-477-1255) 2. "Clip - Support Shelving" - Adapto Storage Products, (800-923-2786) 3. "8000 Series" - - Lyon Workspace Products, LLC (800-433-8488) 4. "Clipper Shelving" - Penco Products, Inc (800-562-1000) WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL STORAGE SHELVING; SECTION 10 56 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 2 B. Design: 1. Stand alone clip type consisting of 4 angle posts, 2 back sway braces, 4 side sway braces and 6 shelves. a. 3'-0" Long Units: Minimum 800 pounds load capacity per shelf. b. 4'-0" Long Units: Minimum 550 pounds load capacity per shelf. C. Components: 1. Angle posts; 13 gage steel, with slots to receive shelf clips. 2. Shelves: 18 gage steel. Front and back shelf flanges turned down to accommodate 1" x 1" x 1/8" reinforcing angles. 3. Shelf Clips: Type recommended and used by shelving manufacturer for required loading. 4. Sway Braces: 1" x 1/8" band iron with holes at ends for attachment to shelving units. 5. Accessories: As required by classification, design and installation requirements. D. Finish: 1. Factory finish in manufacturers standard color selected by Owner’s representative. E. Size and layout as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set units plumb, level and square. Do not secure to adjacent walls. Adjust for rigidity. END OF SECTION DIVISION 11 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 23 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 11 23 13 - LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Guest Laundry Equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 53 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 2. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Coordinate equipment lists and schedules. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit: 1. Product Data: Mark each copy to identify applicable products, characteristics, models, options and other supplemental data to clearly communicate information specific to this Project. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Indicate cabinet sizes, materials, details of construction, methods of fastening, location of built-in appliances and erection details. b. Indicate locations of plumbing and electrical rough-ins. 3. Samples: Submit samples of wood finish. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Applicable requirements of standards and specifications referenced herein apply to the work of this Section. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to all applicable codes for utility requirements. 2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 3. All gas-fired equipment shall be AGA-Approved and provided with 100% safety pilot lights. Any electric ignition devices or high-heat sensors shall be UL Listed and AGA- Approved. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products clear of floor in a manner to prevent damage. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 23 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 B. Coordinate size of access and route to place of installation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with location and placement of utilities. Coordinate characteristics of utilities with requirements of food service equipment. B. Schedule Work to immediately follow installation of utilities and precede installation of room finishes. C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLOTHES WASHERS AND DRYERS A. Clothes Washer ADA: Complying with AHAM HLW-1. 1. Manufacturers: a. General Electric Company (GE Appliances) b. LG Electronics c. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation 2. Type: Freestanding, front-loading unit. a. Dimensions: 1) Width: 27 inches or as indicated on Drawings. 2) Depth: 34 inches or as indicated on Drawings. 3) Height: 40 inches or as indicated on Drawings. b. Drum: Manufacturer's standard. 1) Capacity: 4.3 cu. ft. c. Controls: Touch-pad controls for water-fill levels, wash/rinse water temperatures and variable-speed and fabric selectors. 1) Wash Cycles: Four wash cycles, including regular, delicate, and permanent press. 2) Wash Temperatures: Three settings. 3) Speed Combinations: Four. d. Electrical Power: 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A. e. Motor: Manufacturer's standard with built-in overload protector. f. ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product-labeling program. g. Water-Efficient Clothes Washer: Provide clothes washer with modified energy factor greater than or equal to 2.0 and water factor less than 5.5. h. Appliance Finish: Enamel. 1) Color: White. i. Front-Panel Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 1) Panel Color: White. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 23 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 B. Clothes Dryer ADA: Complying with AHAM HLD-1. 1. Manufacturers: a. General Electric Company (GE Appliances) b. LG Electronics c. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation 2. Type: Freestanding, frontloading, electric or electric, ventless unit. a. Dimensions: 1) Width: 27 inches or as indicated on Drawings. 2) Depth: 34 inches or as indicated on Drawings. 3) Height: 40 inches or as indicated on Drawings. b. Drum: Manufacturer's standard. 1) Capacity: 8.3 cu. ft. (0.20 cu. m). c. Controls: Touch-pad controls for drying cycle, temperatures, and fabric selectors. d. Electric-Dryer Power: 240 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 30 A. e. Appliance Finish: Enamel. 1) Color: White. f. Front-Panel Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 1) Panel Color: White. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify condition of existing conditions before starting work. Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required location. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Verify water and drains are correct and in the required locations. B. Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals. C. Weld and grind joints in steel work tight, without open seams, where necessary due to limitations of sheet sizes or installation requirements. D. Sequence installation and erection to ensure correct mechanical and electrical utility connections are achieved. E. Cut, fit, and patch where necessary. Provide cutting and patching of items of this section required for installation or services of equipment. Any field cutting, joining, or patching shall be shop quality, match the surrounding material, and be fully finished and regrained. F. Cut and drill components for service outlets, fixtures, and fittings. G. Use anchoring devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage. Wall blocking to be provided of a size and strength necessary to support all wall mounted equipment. H. Provide clear silicone sealant to achieve clean joint with adjacent building finishes and between abutting components. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 23 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions. B. Remove and replace equipment creating excessive noise or vibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces. B. Wash and clean equipment. C. Polish glass, plastic, hardware, accessories, fixtures, and fittings. END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 REGISTRATION EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 25 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 11 25 13 - REGISTRATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Deposit Boxes. 2. Employees Depository Safe B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: 2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: 3. Section 12 30 00 - Architectural Woodwork 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings with the following supporting data: 1. Product Data: Mark each copy to identify applicable products, characteristics, models, options and other supplemental data to clearly communicate information specific to this project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DEPOSIT BOXES A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Model No. CSP-17; Corporate Security Products 2. Approved substitution by Hamilton Safe 3. Approved substitution by Diebold, Incorporated. B. Configuration: 1. Model CSP-17: 12 Openings 5” x 5”; 4 openings 5” x 10”; and 1 opening 10” x 10”. C. Overall Dimensions: 1. Model CSP-17: 32-1/2”W x 21”H x 24”D D. Door Face Material: Polished Aluminum with Stamped Numbers E. Case and Case Edge Finish: Black WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 REGISTRATION EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 25 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 2 2.02 EMPLOYEES DEPOSITORY SAFE A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. "Model No. KR-2116-F, Rev. A”; Corporate Security Products 2. Hamilton Safe 3. Diebold, Incorporated. B. Size, outside measurement (verify with manufacturer's submittal). 1. Height: 25-1/4 inches 2. Width: 16-1/2 inches 3. Depth: 23 inches (add 2 inches for handle) 4. Coordinate size and locations with Drawings 5. Provide combination lock with three locking bolts 6. Provide four-compartment coin rack C. "B" rated door with single lock bolt. D. DP Hopper style cash drop, 2" x 10" x 8". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate with approved shop drawings for millwork and Section 12 30 00 - Architectural Woodwork. END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES; SECTION 11 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 11 31 00 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Guest Room and Employee Lounge Appliances a. Microwave Oven - Countertop b. Refrigerator - Undercounter B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 (06100) - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 12 30 00 (06400) - Architectural Woodwork 1.3 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications: 1. 70 "National Electric Code" B. US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)/US Department of Energy Program: 1. ENERGY STAR Performance Rating System 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and with the following supporting data: 1. Product Data: For each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements, include complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance. 2. Appliance Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using the same room designations on Drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the residential appliance manufacturer for installation of appliances required for this Project. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES; SECTION 11 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 B. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source. C. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. E. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. F. ENERGY STAR Performance Rating: Where indicated, provide ENERGY STAR qualified products that meet the energy efficiency requirements set forth in ENERGY STAR product specifications. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with location and placement of utilities. Coordinate characteristics of utilities with requirements of residential appliances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the appliances indicated for each designation in the Residential Appliance Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS (AS IDENTIFIED IN THE APPLIANCE SCHEDULE) A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. GE Appliances Sales 1. Aboscold Corp. 2. Whirlpool Corporation 2.3 FINISHES A. Exterior Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied exterior finish, impervious to cleaning materials commonly used on kitchen appliances, over cleaned and pretreated steel sheet. 1. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES; SECTION 11 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, to verify actual locations of services before residential appliance installation. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to Division 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. PART 4 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SCHEDULE 4.1 APPLIANCES A. Microwave Oven (X-603): 1. Description: Compact 0.9 cu.ft. Microwave Oven – AM090D; by Absocold Corporation 2. Power: 115 volt, 60 Hz., AC, 15 amp grounded outlet required 3. Dimensions: 11” H, 18 3/8” W, 14 3/8” D 4. Location: Guestroom Entry / Under Counter B. Under-counter Refrigerator (X-602): 1. Description: Suite Fridge® ARD204ABS10R/L; by Absocold Corporation 2. Power: 115 volt, 60 Hz., AC, 15 amp grounded outlet required 3. Dimensions: 22 3/8” H, 18 1/2” W, 19” D 4. Location: Guestroom Entry / Under Counter WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES; SECTION 11 31 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 40 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 11 40 00 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Food Service Equipment 2. Vending Equipment 3. Buffet Shield System (Sneeze Guard) B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 3. Section 12 32 13 - Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets 4. Section 12 32 16 - Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets 5. Division 23 (15) Sections: Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment 6. Division 26 (16) Sections: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 7. Food Service & Laundry Equipment Product Manual 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Applicable requirements of standards and specifications referenced herein apply to the work of this Section. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to all applicable codes for utility requirements. 2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 3. All gas-fired equipment shall be AGA-Approved and provided with 100% safety pilot lights. Any electric ignition devices or high-heat sensors shall be UL Listed and AGA- Approved. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products clear of floor in a manner to prevent damage. B. Coordinate size of access and route to place of installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with location and placement of utilities. Coordinate characteristics of utilities with requirements of food service equipment. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 40 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 B. Schedule Work to immediately follow installation of utilities and precede installation of room finishes. Coordinate with Owner. C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Food Service & Laundry Equipment Product Manual 2.02 VENDING EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Food Service & Laundry Equipment Product Manual 2.03 BUFFET SHIELD SYSTEM (SNEEZE GUARD) A. Refer to Food Service & Laundry Equipment Product Manual PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify condition of existing conditions before starting work. Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required location. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Verify water and drains are correct and in the required locations. B. Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals. C. Weld and grind joints in steel work tight, without open seams, where necessary due to limitations of sheet sizes or installation requirements. D. Sequence installation and erection to ensure correct mechanical and electrical utility connections are achieved. E. Cut, fit, and patch where necessary. Provide cutting and patching of items of this section required for installation or services of equipment. Any field cutting, joining, or patching shall be shop quality, match the surrounding material, and be fully finished and regrained. F. Cut and drill components for service outlets, fixtures, and fittings. G. Use anchoring devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage. Wall blocking to be provided of a size and strength necessary to support all wall mounted equipment. H. Provide clear silicone sealant to achieve clean joint with adjacent building finishes and between abutting components. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 40 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions. B. Remove and replace equipment creating excessive noise or vibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces. B. Wash and clean equipment. C. Polish glass, plastic, hardware, accessories, fixtures, and fittings. END OF SECTION WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT; SECTION 11 40 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 DIVISION 12 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CURTAINS AND DRAPES; SECTION 12 22 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 122200 - CURTAINS AND DRAPES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Drapes. 2. Drapery tracks. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Drapery Tracks: Include maximum weights of drapes that can be supported. a. Motorized Tracks: Indicate motor weights, motor-mounting requirements, and electrical requirements. 2. Fabrics. 3. Textile treatments. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Drapery Tracks: Show installation and anchorage details and locations of controls. 2. Drapes: Show sizes, locations, and details of installation. C. Samples: As follows: 1. Drapery Tracks: 18 inches (450 mm) long, with carriers, controls, and accessories. 2. Drapery Fabrics: For each color and pattern indicated, full width by 36 inches (1000 mm) long, from dye lot to be used for the Work and with specified textile treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat if any. Mark top and face of fabric. 3. Textile Trims: For each color and pattern indicated, 18 inches (450 mm) long. 4. Drape Fabrication: For each heading, fabric, color, and pattern indicated, a complete full- size panel to verify details of fabrication and thread colors. D. Samples for Verification: As follows: 1. Drapery Tracks: 18 inches (450 mm) long, with carriers, controls, and accessories. 2. Drapery Fabrics: For each color and pattern indicated, full width by 36 inches (1000 mm) long, from dye lot to be used for the Work and with specified textile treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat if any. Mark top and face of fabric. 3. Textile Trims: For each color and pattern indicated, 18 inches (450 mm) long. 4. Drape Fabrication: For each heading, fabric, color, and pattern indicated, a complete full- size panel to verify details of fabrication and thread colors. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CURTAINS AND DRAPES; SECTION 12 22 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: For drapery track installation; reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating track installation with openings and ceiling-mounted items. B. Product Certificates: For each drapery fabric treated with flame retardant, signed by fabric supplier and indicating treatment durability and cleaning procedures required to maintain treatment effectiveness. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For products installed to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Drapery Track Carriers: For each size indicated, equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 of each size. 2. Drapery Track Controls: For each type indicated, equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 of each type. 3. Drapery Fabrics: For each fabric, color, and pattern indicated, from the same product run, full-width lengths equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than [10 yards of each fabric, color, and pattern. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: For drapes and drapery tracks, fabricator of drapes. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before drape fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Scheduling: Do not deliver or install drapes until after other finish work, including painting, is complete and spaces are otherwise ready for occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DRAPERY TRACKS A. Manually Operated Track: 1. Manufacturers: a. Kirsch Window Fashions; a Newell Rubbermaid brand b. McMurray Company 2. Construction: Extruded aluminum, slotted for mounting at interval of not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CURTAINS AND DRAPES; SECTION 12 22 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 a. Lengths and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings. b. Support Capability: 45 lb (20 kg) mounted on track length indicated. c. Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Mounting Brackets: Aluminum, of type suitable for fastening track to surface indicated and designed to support weight of track assembly and drape plus force applied to operate track. a. Mounting Surface: Underside of structure above. b. Size: Adjustable. 4. Installation Fasteners: Sized to support track assembly and drape, and fabricated from metal compatible with track, brackets, and supporting construction. Provide two fasteners to fasten each bracket to supporting construction. 5. Operation: Baton. a. Draw: Two ways, center opening. b. Operating Hardware Location: Left. 6. Carriers: Rollers with hooks. a. Master Carriers: Butt. 7. End Stops: Manufacturer's standard with track end cap. 2.2 DRAPES A. Manufacturers: B. Source Limitations: Obtain each color and pattern of drapery fabric and trim from one dye lot. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fabrics treated with fire retardants, provide products that pass NFPA 701 as determined by testing of fabrics that were treated using treatment- application method intended for use for this Project by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Drape: 1. Heading: a. Euro Pleats: 100 percent fullness; three-fold (fingers) each pleat. b. Heading Accessories: 1) Nonwoven buckram. 2) Woven snap tape, 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide, with nickel-plated snaps at 4 inches (102 mm) o.c. 3) Hooks. 2. Drapery Fabric: 3. Manufacturers: 4. Fiber Content: 5. Orientation: Run right (up the bolt). 6. Width: 7. Textile Treatments: Stain repellent; and flame retardant, polymer type. 8. Lining Fabric: a. Lining Type: Acoustical b. Product: c. Color: d. Textile Treatments: Stain repellent; and flame retardant, polymer type. 9. Textile Trim: 10. Hem Weights: Tape type (string weights). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CURTAINS AND DRAPES; SECTION 12 22 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 2.3 DRAPE FABRICATION A. Fabricate drapes in heading styles and fullnesses indicated. Fabricate headings to stand erect. If less than a full width of fabric is required to produce panel of specified fullness, use equal widths of not less than one-half width of fabric located at ends of panel. 1. One-Way-Stacking Drapes: Add 5 inches (127 mm) to overall width for returns. 2. Center-Opening Drapes: Add 10 inches (254 mm) to overall width for overlap. B. Seams: Sew vertical seams with twin-needle sewing machine with selvage trimmed and overlocked. Join widths so that patterns match and vertical seams lay flat and straight without puckering. Horizontal seams are unacceptable. C. Side Hems: Double-turned, 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric, and blindstitched so that stitches are invisible on face of drape. D. Bottom Hems: Double-turned, 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric, and weighted and blindstitched so that weights and stitches are invisible on face of drape. 1. Sew in square lead weights at each seam and at panel corners. E. Interlinings: Extend from top of drape to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of lining's bottom hem and to leading edge of side hems to produce full-shadowed appearance. F. Linings: Equal to widths of drapery fabric and joined to drapery fabric at top by inside invisible seam, and hand stitched at side hems and shadowed with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) return of face fabric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DRAPERY TRACK INSTALLATION A. Install track systems according to manufacturer's written instructions, level and plumb, and at height and location in relation to adjoining openings as indicated on Drawings. B. Isolate metal parts of tracks and brackets from concrete, masonry, and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use tape or another method recommended in writing by track manufacturer. 3.2 DRAPE INSTALLATION A. Where drapes abut overhead construction, hang drapes so that clearance between headings and overhead construction is 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). B. Where drapes extend to floor, install so that bottom hems clear finished floor by not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Where drapes extend to windowsill, install so that bottom hems hang above sill line and clear sill line by not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CURTAINS AND DRAPES; SECTION 12 22 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After hanging drapes, test and adjust each drapery track to produce unencumbered, smooth operation. B. Steam and dress down drapes as required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free installation. C. Remove and replace drapes that are stained or soiled. END OF SECTION 122200 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CURTAINS AND DRAPES; SECTION 12 22 00 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES; SECTION 12 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 8 SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual operated roller shades with single roller. 2. Motor-operated roller shades with single rollers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. 1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material. C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES; SECTION 12 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 8 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES; SECTION 12 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 8 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hunter Douglas Contract 2. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc 3. MechoShade Systems, Inc B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted. C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle- end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. E. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light-blocking fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Exposed with endcaps and integral light seal at bottom where it meets the sill. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm). 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed. 4. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 MOTOR-OPERATED, SINGLE-ROLLER SHADES A. Manufacturers: 1. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc 2. MechoShade Systems, Inc WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES; SECTION 12 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 8 A. Motorized Operating System: Provide factory-assembled, shade-operator system of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions indicated, complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, power disconnect switch, enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system. 1. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in roller. a. Electrical Characteristics: 110-V ac. b. Maximum Total Shade Width: As required to operate roller shades indicated. c. Maximum Shade Drop: As required to operate roller shades indicated. d. Maximum Weight Capacity: As required to operate roller shades indicated. 3. Remote Control: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or flush mounting. Provide the following for remote-control activation of shades: a. Individual Switch Control Station: Momentary-contact, wall-switch-operated control stations with open, close, and center off functions. 1) Switch Positions: Three. 2) Switch Style: Rocker. b. Individual/Group Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-position, rocker-style, wall-switch-operated control station with open, close, and center off functions for individual and group control. c. Timer Control: Clock timer, 24-hour programmable for regular events. d. Microprocessor Control: Electronic programmable means for setting, changing, and adjusting control features; isolated from voltage spikes and surges. e. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Crank-Operator Override: Crank and gearbox operate shades in event of power outage or motor failure. 5. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to stop shades automatically at fully raised and fully lowered positions. 6. Operating Features: a. Group switching with integrated switch control; single faceplate for multiple switch cutouts. b. Capable of interface with audiovisual control system. c. Capable of accepting input from building automation control system. d. Override switch. B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle- end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Reverse, from front (interior face) of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES; SECTION 12 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 8 D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers that are operated by one roller drive-end assembly. E. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm). 2. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure. a. Height: Manufacturer's standard in height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm). 3. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 4. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed for recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end plates, and removable bottom closure panel. a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 6 inches (152 mm). b. Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel. 5. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip without fasteners. a. Closure-Panel Width: 2 inches (51 mm). 6. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops. 7. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed. 8. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 SHADEBAND MATERIALS A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES; SECTION 12 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 8 1. Source: EuroTwill Reversible Weave 6000; Twillweave. 2. Type: Woven polyester and PVC-coated polyester. 3. Weave: Basketweave. 4. Thickness: 0.26 inch. 5. Weight: 14.4 oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. m). 6. Roll Width: 96 inches (2134 mm). 7. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt. 8. Openness Factor: 3 percent. 9. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and listed on the Finish Schedule. 2.5 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2-inch (13-mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible, except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches (51 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES; SECTION 12 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 7 of 8 B. Electrical Connections: Connect motor-operated roller shades to building electrical system. C. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades. END OF SECTION 122413 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES; SECTION 12 24 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 8 of 8 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 3 SECTION 123616 - METAL COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes stainless-steel countertops and shelves. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail fabrication and installation, including field joints. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver metal countertops only after casework has been completed in installation areas. B. Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during handling and installation. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction to receive metal countertops by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. B. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone. 2. Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone; Class 25. 3. Color: Clear. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 3 2.2 STEEL COUNTERTOPS A. Countertops: Fabricate from Bronze Satin by Rigidized Metals 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick, steel sheet. Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane, free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over the base cabinets. 1. Joints: Fabricate countertops without field-made joints. 2. Weld shop-made joints. 3. Sound deaden the undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating. 4. Extend the top down to provide a 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick edge with a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) return flange. 5. Form the backsplash coved to and integral with top surface, with a 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm) thick top edge and 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) return flange. 6. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of tops containing sinks; pitch tops containing sinks two ways to provide drainage without channeling or grooving. 7. Where steel sinks occur in steel tops, factory weld into one integral unit. B. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fabricate from Bronze Satin by Rigidized Metals steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm) nominal thickness. Weld shop-made joints. Fold up the front edge a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm); fold up the back edge a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Provide integral stiffening brackets, formed by folding up ends a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) and by welding to upturned back edge. 2.3 STEEL FINISH A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4 finish, with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metal countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install metal countertops level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing; use fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. C. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent; use two or more fasteners at each front, end, and back. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 3 D. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. E. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. F. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fasten to masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each shelf through upturned back edge at not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation. B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect. C. Protection: Provide 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over the countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1220 mm) o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 123616 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 123619 - WOOD COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood countertops. 2. Shop finishing of wood countertops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials and processes. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in wood countertops. 2. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. 3. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 12 inches (300 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent- finished woodwork. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Fabricator. B. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates or WI Certified Compliance Program certificates. C. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage wood countertops have been completed in installation areas. If wood countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where wood countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D. Established Dimensions: Where wood countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where wood countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Aren Design, Inc.; Dotsero, CO 2. Armani Fine Woodworking; Englewood, CO 3. Vail Custom Woodworking; Vail CO WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 2.2 WOOD COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Premium. C. Type of Top: Solid wide width for transparent finish. Solid wood, edge glued, with crown direction reversed in adjacent boards, to produce widths indicated. Select boards for similarity of color and grain and arrange boards for optimum match between adjacent boards. 1. Wood Species and Cut: As indicated. a. Species: As indicated on drawings. b. Cut: Rift sawn. D. Type of Top: Solid strip plank for transparent finish. Narrow strips of lumber glued together. Arrange strips for random mix of color and grain. 1. Wood Species: As indicated on drawings. 2. Strip Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm) wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Manufacturers: Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate wood countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges of Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.6 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish architectural wood countertops at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Shop Finished: Shop apply stain and finishing coats. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Same as item to be finished. 2. Finish: System - 8, water-based cross linking acrylic. 3. Finish: System - 9, UV curable acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane. 4. Finish: System - 13, catalyzed polyester. 5. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 6. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 7. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 8. Sheen: [Satin, 31-45] [Semigloss, 46-60] gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing wood countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble wood countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install wood countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut wood countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood countertops. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective wood countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean wood countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 123619 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WOOD COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 19 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill SECTION 12 36 23.13; PAGE 1 of 6 BASKERVILL 2.150391.0 SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and fire-retardant-treated materials. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets soap dispensers electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in plastic-laminate countertops. 2. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. 3. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. High-pressure decorative laminate. 2. Chemical-resistant, high-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill SECTION 12 36 23.13; PAGE 2 of 6 BASKERVILL 2.150391.0 C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates or WI Certified Compliance Program certificates. D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide certificates from AWI or WI certification program indicating that countertops comply with requirements of grades specified. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill SECTION 12 36 23.13; PAGE 3 of 6 BASKERVILL 2.150391.0 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 1. Manufacturers: a. Formica Corporation b. Nevamar; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand c. Pionite; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand d. Wilsonart D. Chemical-Resistant, High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP, and as follows: 1. Laminate has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.9.5: a. Nitric Acid (30 Percent): Moderate effect. b. Sulfuric Acid (77 Percent): Moderate effect. c. Hydrochloric Acid (37 Percent): Moderate effect. d. Phosphoric Acid (75 Percent): No effect. e. Acetic Acid (98 Percent): No effect. f. Formaldehyde: No effect. g. Ethyl Acetate: No effect. h. Ethyl Ether: No effect. i. Phenol (85 Percent): Moderate effect. j. Benzene: No effect. k. Xylene: No effect. l. Butyl Alcohol: No effect. m. Furfural: No effect. n. Methyl Ethyl Ketone: No effect. o. Sodium Hydroxide (25 Percent): No effect. p. Sodium Sulfide (15 Percent): No effect. q. Ammonium Hydroxide (28 Percent): No effect. r. Zinc Chloride: No effect. s. Gentian Violet: No effect. t. Methyl Red: No effect. 2. Manufacturers: a. Formica Corporation b. Pionite; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand c. Wilsonart E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2. Match Architect's sample. 3. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and listed on the Finish Legend. F. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. G. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill SECTION 12 36 23.13; PAGE 4 of 6 BASKERVILL 2.150391.0 H. Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood. I. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). J. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. K. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD, black, molded- plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Manufacturers: a. Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill SECTION 12 36 23.13; PAGE 5 of 6 BASKERVILL 2.150391.0 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. 1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints. D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill SECTION 12 36 23.13; PAGE 6 of 6 BASKERVILL 2.150391.0 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 123623.13 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 40 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 123640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes stone countertops. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 123661.19 "Quartz Agglomerate Countertops" for quartz-agglomerate countertops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each stone accessory and manufactured product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Show locations and details of joints. 3. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern. C. Samples for Verification: For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square. 1. Include three or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in the completed Work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Material Test Reports: 1. Stone Test Reports: For stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties, according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous five years. 2. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 40 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 6 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For stone countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include product data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate stone countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of stone countertops. C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes. 1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports. 2. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain stone, regardless of finish, from a single quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Specification Section, with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for each. 2. Make stone slabs available for examination by Architect. a. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs and will indicate aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 40 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 6 b. Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval. c. Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed by Architect. 2.2 GRANITE A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615/C 615M. B. Description: Uniform, medium-grained, [pink] [gray] [black] stone. C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. As listed on the Drawings. D. Cut: Vein. E. Cut stone from contiguous, matched slabs in which natural markings occur. F. Finish: As indicated. G. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. 2.3 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and that are recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated. B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: a. Laticrete International, Inc b. MAPEI Corporation c. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. C. Stone Adhesive: Two-part epoxy adhesive, formulated specifically for bonding stone to stone, with an initial set time of not more than two hours at 70 deg F (21 deg C). 1. Manufacturers: a. Akemi North America b. Axson North America, Inc. c. Bonstone Materials Corporation 2. Color: Clear. D. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and that will not stain the stone it is applied to. 1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, mildew resistant, acid curing, silicone. 2. Color: Clear. E. Stone Joint Splines: Stainless-steel or brass washers approximately 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter and of thickness to fit snugly in saw-cut kerf in edge of stone units. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 40 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 6 F. Stone Cleaner: Specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives. G. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Custom Building Products b. Stone Care International Inc. c. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.4 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that may impair structural integrity, function, or appearance. 1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect. B. Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an overall uniform appearance. C. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 2. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments. 4. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work. 5. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly eased unless otherwise indicated. 6. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide matching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts. D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 2.5 STONE COUNTERTOPS A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VII." B. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness. C. Edge Detail: Straight, slightly eased at top, As indicated. D. Splashes: Provide 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) thick unless otherwise indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 40 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 5 of 6 1. Height: As indicated. 2. Top-Edge Detail: Straight, slightly eased at corner. E. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. F. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch (10-mm) radius at juncture of cutout edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening. 2. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive stone countertops and conditions under which stone countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone countertops. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone countertops. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar items to be used by stone countertop Installer for anchoring stone countertops. Furnish installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items. B. Before installing stone countertops, clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives and rinse with clear water. Allow stone to dry before installing. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. B. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than one-fourth of nominal joint width. C. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. D. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 STONE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 40 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 6 of 6 3.4 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. B. Install countertops over subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. C. Install countertops by adhering to supports with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. D. Do not cut stone in field unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment. E. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight, true, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. F. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Shim and adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. Install anchors and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone countertops in place. G. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. H. Apply sealant to joints; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective countertops. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Interior stone countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. D. Clean stone countertops no fewer than six days after completion of installation, using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that may damage stone. E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 123640 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 61.19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 123661.19 - QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quartz agglomerate countertops. 2. Quartz agglomerate apron fronts. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. 1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. One full-size quartz agglomerate countertop, with front edge, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), of construction and in configuration specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For quartz agglomerate countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 61.19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ICPA SS-1, except for composition. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Qyanit by Qortstone Engineered Quartz Surface or equal by one of the following manufacturers: a. Cosentino USA b. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company 2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and as listed on the Finish Legend. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. 2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions and the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Premium. B. Configuration: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. End Splash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. C. Countertops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same material. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 61.19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 D. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. E. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. F. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated. 1. Joint Type: Bonded, 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) or less in width. G. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter dispensers, and similar items. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by quartz agglomerate manufacturer. B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive quartz agglomerate countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS; SECTION 12 36 61.19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. 1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position. 2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width. F. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. G. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. H. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 123661.19 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES ; SECTION 12 48 13 PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient entrance mats with logo. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Custom Graphics: Scale drawing indicating colors. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL A. Structural Performance: Provide roll-up rail mats and frames capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft. (14.36 kN/sq. m). 2. Wheel load of 350 lb (159 kg) per wheel. B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design". WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES ; SECTION 12 48 13 PAGE 2 of 2 2.2 ROLL-UP MATS A. Manufacturers: 1. C/S Group 2. Forbo Industries, Inc. 3. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group 4. Pawling Corporation B. Carpet-Type Mats: Nylon and Polyester carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-inch- (3.2- to 6.4-mm-) thick, flexible vinyl backing to form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch (9.5 or 11 mm) thick with nonraveling edges. 1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2. Mat Size: As indicated. C. Cocoa Mats: Constructed from cocoa fiber yarn permanently bonded to PVC backing for dimensional stability and resistance to shedding; 5/8-inch (16-mm) overall thickness; 1.5-lb/sq. ft. (7.3-kg/sq. m) weight. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2. Mat Size: As indicated. D. Graphics: Custom inlaid or woven-in graphic logo, as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. 1. Anchor fixed surface-type frame members to floor with devices spaced as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 124813 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOSPITALITY FURNITURE INSTALLATION; SECTION 12 54 13.13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 12 54 13.13 - HOSPITALITY FURNITURE INSTALLATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The complete installation of all furniture and fixtures which are furnished by Owner. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 (06100) - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for wall mounted furniture and fixtures. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualified installer shall have experience in installation methods similar to work of this section. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall receive and store all items furnished by Owner. B. The storage area shall be secure and dry with temperatures maintained above 40 degrees F. at all times. C. For each delivery, the Contractor shall fill out receiving reports. Each delivery shall be inspected for damage. All damage shall be noted on the carriers delivery slip as well as the receiving report. Receiving reports and carriers delivery slips shall be forwarded to the Owner immediately upon receipt of delivery. If damaged material is not reported when discovered, the Contractor assumes full responsibility. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Headboard Mounting Items: 1. 2 ea 3" x 3/16" toggle bolts 2. Silicone adhesive 3. Lead shields (concrete walls only). 4. 2 ea 2" #10 pan head screws for each cleat. B. Box Spring and Bed Frame Mounting Items: 1. 4 ea #10 x 3/4" pan headed screws. C. Artwork and Framed Mirror Mounting Items: 1. 2 ea 1/8" x 3" toggle bolts for each item. 2. Lead shields (concrete walls only) 3. 2 each 2" #10 pan head screws (concrete walls only). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HOSPITALITY FURNITURE INSTALLATION; SECTION 12 54 13.13 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall exercise care when installing items so as not to damage or soil adjacent areas and surface. B. Headboard Installation: 1. Mount cleat to wall using toggle bolts as required. 2. Apply three (3) 1" spots of silicone adhesive to bottom rail of headboard. 3. Set headboard on wall cleat and press firmly into place. 4. Clean excess adhesive from wall with approved cleaner. C. Box Spring and Bed Frame Installation: 1. Be sure box spring is properly set in bed frame. 2. Drill 4 ea. - (2 to each side of box springs). Three holes provided in bed frame. 3. Install screw to each hole and tighten in a workmanship manner until box spring is secured to frame. D. Artwork: Install using picture wire, or security cleats and silicone adhesive. E. Lamps and shades: Install complete with bulbs, if directed by Owner’s representative, staple excess lamp cord to the back of furniture. END OF SECTION DIVISION 14 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MACHINE-ROOM-LESS ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS; SECTION 142123.16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 2 SECTION 142123.16 - MACHINE-ROOM-LESS ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cab renovations to existing electric traction passenger elevators. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELEVATORS A. Elevator Description: 1. Passenger Elevator Number(s): 2. Car Enclosures: a. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish to remain. b. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish to remain. c. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Existing Panels. d. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish to remain e. Ceiling: Existing f. Handrails: Reinstall 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round, at rear of car. g. Floor prepared to receive resilient flooring (specified in Section 096516 "Resilient Sheet Flooring"). 2.2 CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Existing steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with removable car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to manufacturer's standard honeycomb core with manufacturer's standard protective edge; Existing to remain. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Existing. 3. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 4. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic. 5. Metallic-Finish, Plastic-Laminate Ceiling: Flush panels, with four low-voltage downlights in each panel. Align ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels. 6. Light Fixture Efficiency: Not less than 35 lumens/W. 7. Ventilation Fan Efficiency: Not less than 3.0 cfm/W (1.4 L/s per W). 2.3 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Existing. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 MACHINE-ROOM-LESS ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS; SECTION 142123.16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 2 2. Star of Life Symbol: Add identify emergency elevators with star of life symbol, not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high, on both jambs of hoistway door frames. 3. Stainless-Steel Doors: Existing. 4. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 5. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. 2.4 FINISH MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063. C. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator. Comply with the following requirements for each elevator used for construction purposes: 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage. 2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. 4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. END OF SECTION 142123.16 DIVISION 21 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS; SECTION 211313 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 5 SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 The wet-pipe sprinkler system shall be an extension to the existing system. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Sprinklers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which items of other systems and equipment are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. B. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable. C. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS; SECTION 211313 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 5 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13. 2. NFPA 13R. B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure. C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design wet-pipe sprinkler systems. 1. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: According to UL listing. D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and Seismic Zone C. 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Match existing copper pipe and fittings system. 2.3 SPRINKLERS A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global’s "Approval Guide." B. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175-psig (1200-kPa) maximum. C. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum. D. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element: 1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767. E. Sprinkler Finishes: Match existing finishes. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS; SECTION 211313 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS A. Connect sprinkler piping to existing building's sprinkler system distribution piping. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. 2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping. C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation. D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. E. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13. F. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. G. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes. H. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building. I. Install alarm devices in piping systems. J. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. In seismic-rated areas, refer to Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment." K. Fill sprinkler system piping with water. L. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping." M. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire- Suppression Piping." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS; SECTION 211313 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 5 N. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping." 3.3 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve. C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources. D. Specialty Valves: 1. Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system. 2. Install alarm valves with bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection. 3. Install deluge valves in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main supply to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. 3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels. B. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. 4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. 6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS; SECTION 211313 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 5 7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment. B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish. END OF SECTION 211313 DIVISION 22 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLUMBING INSULATION; SECTION 220700 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 The plumbing work shall be as described on the drawings and herein. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data for each type of plumbing fixture and insulation material. B. Quality Assurance: Labeled with maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke- developed index of 50 according to ASTM E 84. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. B. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. E. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. F. Factory-Applied Jackets: When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. G. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. H. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLUMBING INSULATION; SECTION 220700 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS 2.3 Shall be as called for on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements of the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association's "National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards" for insulation installation on pipes and equipment. B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall, Partition, and Floor Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations. Seal penetrations. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." D. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation: 1. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation Installation: 1. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. F. Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following piping systems: 1. Domestic hot water. 2. Recirculated domestic hot water. G. Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Sanitary drainage and vent piping. 3. Drainage piping located in crawlspaces unless otherwise indicated. 4. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. 5. Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLUMBING INSULATION; SECTION 220700 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 3.2 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE – See schedule on Drawings. END OF SECTION 220700 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PLUMBING INSULATION; SECTION 220700 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 DIVISION 23 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230513 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 8000 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230513 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. H. Insulation: Class F. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230513 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 230513 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230513 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230519 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Case: Cast aluminum 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 3. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 4. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 5. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F. 6. Window: Glass 7. Stem: Brass and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 8. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230519 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range. 2.2 THERMOWELLS A. Thermowells: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion in piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CSA. 4. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 5. External Threads: ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 6. Internal Threads: ASME B1.1 screw threads. 7. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 8. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 10. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection. B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install thermowells with socket extending center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees. B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes. C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. F. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems. H. Install wafer-orifice flowmeter elements between pipe flanges. I. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. K. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators. L. Install thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. END OF SECTION 230519 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230523.12 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 230523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. D. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves. E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. G. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4 (DN 100). H. Valves in Insulated Piping: 1. Include 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230523.12 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 2. Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES A. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim: 1. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. B. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. 2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim: 1. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. B. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Description: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230523.12 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder- joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3.3 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Brass or bronze ball valves, two piece, with brass, bronze, stainless-steel trim, and full port. 1. Valves may be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. END OF SECTION 230523.12 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230523.12 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230523.14 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 230523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze lift check valves. 2. Bronze swing check valves. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. D. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125: 1. Description: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230523.14 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze. B. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 150: 1. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. 3.4 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230523.14 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125. END OF SECTION 230523.14 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING; SECTION 230523.14 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230529 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Equipment supports. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of cadmium plated carbon steel. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230529 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. 2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- bolts. 2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon- steel shapes. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. 3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230529 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm). 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting". C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230529 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing. F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). 8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. J. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. K. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 230529 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC; SECTION 230548 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Elastomeric hangers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device. 1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic- restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC; SECTION 230548 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind-Restraint Loading: 1. Basic Wind Speed: 120 mph 2. Building Classification Category: III. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by maximum area of HVAC component projected on vertical plane normal to wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal. B. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: C. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods: 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger- rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. END OF SECTION 230548 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230553 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS 1. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm). Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. 2.2 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT; SECTION 230553 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Heating Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background. END OF SECTION 230553 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 12 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant-flow hydronic systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work. F. TDH: Total dynamic head. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Certified TAB reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required. F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows. M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 12 P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Airside: a. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. b. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. g. Ceilings are installed. h. Windows and doors are installed. i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 2. Hydronics: a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. b. Piping is complete with terminals installed. c. Water treatment is complete. d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged. e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open. h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers. j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 12 E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust- air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan- motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 12 C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down the duct from the fan discharge. 2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control. 3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows: a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project. b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record calibration factor. c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units. d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design airflow. f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and cold-deck airstreams unless so designed. g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure. 5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan selection and simulates actual load in the building. c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 6. Measure fan static pressures as follows: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 12 a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow. 8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor. 9. Verify final system conditions as follows: a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary. b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. d. Mark final settings. e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. Measure and record all operating data. f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans. 3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils, and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required coil and heat exchanger flow rates with pump design flow rate. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing as follows: 1. Check highest vent for adequate pressure. 2. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 3. Check that air has been purged from the system. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. 1. Measure total water flow. a. Position valves for full flow through coils. b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. c. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or exchanger pressure drop. 2. Measure pump TDH as follows: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 7 of 12 a. Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves. b. Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. c. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. d. Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow, and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. e. With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition. B. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. 1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. 2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. 3. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows. 1. Measure flow at terminals. 2. Adjust each terminal to design flow. 3. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted. 4. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to maintain design flow. 5. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced. D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals: 1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. E. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals: 1. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. 2. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. F. Verify final system conditions as follows: 1. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. 2. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile. 3. Mark final settings. G. Verify that memory stops have been set. 1. Verify that memory stops have been set. 3.9 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 8 of 12 B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 3.10 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 9 of 12 D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). i. Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s). j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s). k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position. F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 10 of 12 b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). h. Tube size in NPS (DN). i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa). d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa). n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C). o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa). G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 11 of 12 d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa). H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Duct size in inches (mm). f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m). g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm (L/s). h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s). i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s). j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa). I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m). 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). e. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s). f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s). g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C). J. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling-unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC; SECTION 230593 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 12 of 12 b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa). e. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C). K. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm). d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s). e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. L. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. END OF SECTION 230593 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DUCT INSULATION; SECTION 230713 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 3. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation." 2. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in " Insulation Schedule" as shown on the Drawings. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DUCT INSULATION; SECTION 230713 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 2.3 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. 2.4 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: Aluminum. 2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II 2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. 2.7 TAPES A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DUCT INSULATION; SECTION 230713 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DUCT INSULATION; SECTION 230713 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm). 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DUCT INSULATION; SECTION 230713 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward- clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DUCT INSULATION; SECTION 230713 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 8. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward- clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 10. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. 3.6 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. See Insulation Schedule on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 230713 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 10 SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems: 1. Heating hot-water piping, indoors. 2. Refrigerant suction, indoors and outdoors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 10 D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. E. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular material. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers and products. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements." F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. 2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. D. ASJ Adhesive : Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. 2.5 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F (Minus 73 to plus 149 deg C). 4. Color: White or gray. B. ASJ Flashing Sealants: 1. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 10 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: White. 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. 2.7 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. 2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. 2.8 SECUREMENTS A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H- 14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing seal. B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 10 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 10 N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm). 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 10 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 7 of 10 D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 8 of 10 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 FINISHES A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. 3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 9 of 10 B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. See “Insulation Schedule” on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 230719 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC PIPING INSULATION; SECTION 230719 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 10 of 10 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC DDC; SECTION 230993.11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 230993.11 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC DDC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. See “Control Sequences” on the Drawings.. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 230923 "DDC Systems for HVAC" for control equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 230993.11 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC DDC; SECTION 230993.11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PIPING; SECTION 232113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following: 1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Condensate-drain piping. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 125 psig (kPa) at 200 deg F (93 deg C). 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C). B. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PIPING; SECTION 232113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller the following: 1. Type M (Type C), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered, brazed or pressure-seal joints. B. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PIPING; SECTION 232113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using [mechanically formed ]tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. S. Comply with requirements in Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for installation of expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides. T. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping. U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PIPING; SECTION 232113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 B. Comply with requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for seismic restraints. C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6 m) long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m). 2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m). 3. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m). 4. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m). E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32):Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 4. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 5. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot (3-m) intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead- free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PIPING; SECTION 232113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings. G. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints. 3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply with requirements in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." END OF SECTION 232113 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PIPING; SECTION 232113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES; SECTION 232116 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following: 1. Air-vent piping. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 2. Air-control devices. 3. Hydronic specialties. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15). 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6). 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C). 2.2 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends fand smaller. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES; SECTION 232116 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 3. In "Strainer Screen" Subparagraph below, larger mesh numbers have larger passages, thus allowing larger objects to pass. 4. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 40mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket. 5. CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. B. Install throttling-duty balancing] valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. 3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. END OF SECTION 232116 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PUMPS; SECTION 232123 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pump. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in- line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. B. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, all bronze with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable wear rings, and threaded companion-flange connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal. C. Motor: ECM and rigidly mounted to pump casing. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HYDRONIC PUMPS; SECTION 232123 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4. B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain. E. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and of size required to support weight of in-line pumps. Hangers attached to inlet & outlet pipe flanges. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." 2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping" and Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties." B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance. D. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. E. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. F. Install check valve and throttling valve with memory stop on discharge side of pumps. G. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. H. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." I. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." END OF SECTION 232123 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 REFRIGERANT PIPING; SECTION 232300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings. 2. Refrigerant piping valves and specialties. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and refrigerant piping specialty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A: 1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig (2068 kPa). 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube ASTM B 280, Type ACR. B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 REFRIGERANT PIPING; SECTION 232300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M. 2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern. 2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring. 3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 4. Seat: Nylon. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C). 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F (135 deg C). B. Solenoid Valves: Comply with AHRI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by a National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter, and 24 V ac coil. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C). C. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with AHRI 750. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 6. Superheat: Adjustable. 7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications). 8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig (3100 kPa). D. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina. 4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa). 8. Rated Flow: 20 tons. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C). 2.4 REFRIGERANTS A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 REFRIGERANT PIPING; SECTION 232300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A 3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor. B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers. C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection. D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers. E. Install a full-size, three-valve bypass around filter dryers. F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top. G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location. H. Install safety relief valves where required by 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15. I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for the device being protected: 1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Compressor. K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in the suction line at the compressor. L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge. M. Install flexible connectors at compressors. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 REFRIGERANT PIPING; SECTION 232300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Refer to Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation. K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 REFRIGERANT PIPING; SECTION 232300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. R. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. 3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6 m) long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. NPS 5/8 (DN 18): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 4. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 REFRIGERANT PIPING; SECTION 232300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 5. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 6. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 7. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 108 inches (2700 mm); minimum rod, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 8. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). 9. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod, 1/2 inch (13 mm). D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor. 3.6 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers (67 Pa). If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig (14 kPa). 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature. D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings. E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established. END OF SECTION 232300 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 10 SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealant and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts. 3. Section 233119 "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment. 4. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible". 1. Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15. C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 10 1. Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." 2. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." 3. Duct-Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-up." 4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 5. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives and sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 10 d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. g. <Insert item>. B. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 10 B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm) in Diameter: Flanged. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180). 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 10 2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches (102 mm). 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 10 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m) and shall be rated for10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 7 of 10 F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. 3.2 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 8 of 10 C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m). F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.5 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 9 of 10 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. 3.6 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows: B. Supply and Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (500 Pa) for supply duct, 2 inch for return duct and 1 inch for outdoor air duct. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. C. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6 D. Elbow Configuration: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 METAL DUCTS; SECTION 233113 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 10 of 10 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. E. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular or Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. END OF SECTION 233113 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES; SECTION 233300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Flange connectors. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct-mounted access doors. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES; SECTION 233300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Standard leakage rating. 2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 3. Frames: a. Frame: Hat-shaped. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 4. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. 5. Bearings: a. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 6. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc- plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Description: Add-On factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. B. Material: Galvanized steel. C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. B. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." C. Vane Construction: Single wall. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES; SECTION 233300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. Upstream from duct filters. 2. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 3. Elsewhere as indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES; SECTION 233300 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. H. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. J. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to duct[ directly or with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. K. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. L. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. END OF SECTION 233300 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLEXIBLE DUCTS; SECTION 233346 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 233346 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulated flexible ducts. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. C. Comply with the Air Diffusion Council's "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1." D. Comply with ASTM E 96/E 96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials." 2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLEXIBLE DUCTS; SECTION 233346 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 4. Insulation R-Value: R 6 2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS A. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 through 460 mm), to suit duct size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork should not be exposed to UV lighting. C. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. D. Connect diffusers to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. E. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. F. Installation: 1. Install ducts fully extended. 2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners. 3. Bends of flexible ducting shall not exceed a minimum of one duct diameter. 4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits. 5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line, without sags, twists, or turns. G. Supporting Flexible Ducts: 1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide or wider and spaced a maximum of 48 inches (1200 mm) apart. Maximum centerline sag between supports shall not exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm) per 12 inches (300 mm). 2. Install extra supports at bends placed approximately one duct diameter from center line of the bend. 3. Ducts may rest on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall not exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation instructions. 4. Vertically installed ducts shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72 inches (1800 mm) o.c. END OF SECTION 233346 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS; SECTION 233423 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 2. In-line centrifugal fans. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. B. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. C. Belt Drives: 1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS; SECTION 233423 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. 5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. D. Accessories: 1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. 5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. E. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange. 2. Coordinate curb height with roof deck construction and insulation thickness; 3. Overall Height: 12 inches (300 mm) 4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. 2.2 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. B. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. D. Accessories: 1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS; SECTION 233423 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs. B. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. C. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. E. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION 233423 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS; SECTION 233423 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR TERMINAL UNITS; SECTION 233600 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Series, fan-powered air terminal units. 2. Casing liner. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of air terminal unit. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for air terminal units. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan-Powered-Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Section 6 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR TERMINAL UNITS; SECTION 233600 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 2.2 SERIES FAN-POWERED AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and fan in series arrangement inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud for installation above a ceiling. 1. Designed for quiet operation. B. Casing: Galvanized steel, single wall. 1. Casing Liner: Comply with requirements in "Casing Liner" Article for fibrous-glass duct liner. 2. Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. 3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. 4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches. 5. Fan: Forward-curved centrifugal. 6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. C. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with flow-sensing ring and peripheral gasket and self- lubricating bearings. D. Velocity Sensors: Multipoint array with velocity sensors in air inlets and air outlets. E. Motor: 1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Type: Electronically commutated motor. 3. Fan-Motor Assembly Isolation: Rubber isolators. a. Speed Control: Infinitely adjustable with electronic controls. F. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Material: Pleated cotton-polyester media having 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV. 2. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). G. Attenuator Section: galvanized steel sheet. 1. Attenuator Section Liner: Comply with requirements in "Casing Liner" Article for fibrous- glass duct liner. 2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. H. Hydronic Heating Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm), and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1380 kPa) and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F (104 deg C). Include manual air vent and drain valve. 2.3 CASING LINER A. Casing Liner: Fibrous-glass duct liner, complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR TERMINAL UNITS; SECTION 233600 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 1. Minimum Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 5, "Hangers and Supports" and with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.2 TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. C. Install wall-mounted thermostats. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Where installing piping adjacent to air terminal unit, allow space for service and maintenance. B. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties," and connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange. END OF SECTION 233600 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR TERMINAL UNITS; SECTION 233600 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR DIFFUSERS; SECTION 233713.13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers. 2. Section 233713.23 "Air Registers and Grilles" for adjustable-bar register and grilles, fixed-face registers and grilles, and linear bar grilles. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR AND SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. B. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 2.2 LINEAR BAR DIFFUSERS A. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. B. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers level and plumb. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR DIFFUSERS; SECTION 233713.13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713.13 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES; SECTION 233713.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 233713.23 - AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adjustable blade face 2. Fixed face B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to registers and grilles. 2. Section 233713.13 "Air Diffusers" for various types of air diffusers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REGISTERS A. Adjustable Blade Face Register B. Fixed Face Register 2.2 GRILLES A. Adjustable Blade Face Grille Copy paragraph below and re-edit for each product. B. Fixed Face Grille PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES; SECTION 233713.23 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713.23 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS; SECTION 238126 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners. D. Equipment Mounting: 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS; SECTION 238126 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC." E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 1. Water Coil Connections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Connect hydronic piping to supply and return coil connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection. B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit. C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split- system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." END OF SECTION 238126 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS; SECTION 238239.19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 238239.19 - WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes wall heaters with electric-resistance heating coils. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A. Assembly including chassis, electric heating coil, fan, motor, and controls. Comply with UL 2021. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 CABINET A. Front Panel: Removable panels fastened with tamperproof fasteners. B. Finish: Baked enamel over baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard color selected by Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -tested wall and ceiling heaters before shipping. C. Surface-Mounted Cabinet Enclosure: Steel with finish to match cabinet. 2.3 COIL A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in corrosion-resistant metallic WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS; SECTION 238239.19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 sheath. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless- steel hardware, and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Provide integral circuit breaker for overcurrent protection. 2.4 FAN AND MOTOR A. Fan: Aluminum propeller directly connected to motor. B. Motor: Permanently lubricated. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2.5 CONTROLS A. Controls: Unit-mounted thermostat. B. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection with disconnect switch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Install wall and ceiling unit heaters level and plumb. C. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." END OF SECTION 238239.19 DIVISION 26 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES; SECTION 260519 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Submittals: Submittal data shall be clearly marked/highlighted indicating catalog number, product, materials or devices being used for this project. C. Field quality-control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW, UF, and USE. C. Type ‘MC’ cable with ground is acceptable for branch circuits within walls and finish ceilings. If ‘MC’ cable is installed; install parallel and perpendicular and terminate in an accessible junction box at last device and transition to EMT & wire for branch circuit feeders terminating within existing / new panelboards. ‘MC’ cable install shall be done in a clean and neat manner. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES; SECTION 260519 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 2. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 3. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 4. Tyco Electronics Corp. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES; SECTION 260519 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND WIRING METHODS A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN- THWN, single conductors in raceway. D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. G. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. H. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES; SECTION 260519 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 3.4 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. C. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. D. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. E. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. F. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. G. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. I. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.5 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES; SECTION 260519 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 260519 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES; SECTION 260519 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Submittals: Submittal data shall be clearly marked/highlighted indicating catalog number, product, materials or devices being used for this project. C. Field quality-control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. B. Water Heater: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. C. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location; if not existing and work is being conducted in the noted cabinet, closet.. 1. Telephone Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch copper grounding bus if not existing. Field verify the Communications system is properly grounded to the building grounding system via copper bus bar(s).. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. C. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. D. Reference Grounding System Detail on Contract Documents for specifics on building ground requirements and grounding of equipment / devices. END OF SECTION 260526 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 29 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 4 SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. D. Submittals: Submittal data shall be clearly marked/highlighted indicating catalog number, product, materials or devices being used for this project. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 29 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 4 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation. d. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4. 6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 29 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 4 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 3. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 4. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 5. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 29 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 4 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 8 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 4. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Metal Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. Perma-Cote. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 8 2. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 4. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. 5. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 6. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated IMC. a. Comply with NEMA RN 1. b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. 7. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 8. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. 9. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. B. Metal Fittings: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. b. Perma-Cote. 2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 4. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: Setscrew. 5. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 6. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Nonmetallic Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Condux International, Inc. b. RACO; Hubbell. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. B. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 8 1. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. 2. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. 3. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. C. Nonmetallic Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Condux International, Inc. b. RACO; Hubbell. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 3. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 4. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 5. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Incorporated. 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 3. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Semi-adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb (32 kg). 1. Listing and labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 8 H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. J. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. K. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. L. Gangable boxes are prohibited. M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. N. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of fiberglass. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. c. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with [open] [closed] [integral closed] bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 8 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC or IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC or RNC 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC or LFNC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated. 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: RNC identified for such use. 2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT or IMC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: EMT or IMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 2. EMT: Use setscrew fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg. F. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 8 C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inc trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Transition from ENT / PVC ( in slab) to RNC, or IMC at ell, before penetrating slab and rising above floor. I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35-mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. N. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. All empty conduits shall include a bushing along with the pull wire. O. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 7 of 8 P. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. Q. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. R. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. S. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a rain-tight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box. T. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. U. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. V. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. W. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. X. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, 48-inches below grade. E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 33 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 8 of 8 3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 48.16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Restraint channel bracings. 2. Restraint cables. 3. Seismic-restraint accessories. 4. Mechanical anchor bolts. 5. Adhesive anchor bolts. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device. 1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment weight, operation, and seismic and wind forces required to select seismic and wind restraints. a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. 3. Seismic-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 48.16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations). 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic- restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. D. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind-Restraint Loading: 1. Basic Wind Speed: 90 MPH. 2. Building Classification Category: II. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by maximum area of HVAC component projected on vertical plane normal to wind direction and 45 degrees either side of normal. B. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: C. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II. a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5. c. Component Amplification Factor: 1.0. 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods 0.2 Second 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 7% WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 48.16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 2.2 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. 2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC. B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings. D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs. E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used. F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. 2.4 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 48.16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints: 1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. B. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. C. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. E. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 48.16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members. 2. Test at least [four] <Insert number> of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 3. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. B. Seismic controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 260548.16 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 48.16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 53 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Labels. 3. Tags. 4. Signs. 5. Paint for identification. 6. Fasteners for labels and signs. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate composition, size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Comply with NFPA 70E and Section 260574 "Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study" requirements for arc-flash warning labels. F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 53 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. White letters on a Black field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage; where fed from, and system or service type. B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. 4. Color for Neutral: White or gray. 5. Color for Equipment Grounds: Bare copper. 6. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe. C. Warning Label Colors: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. D. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." E. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Black letters on a white field. 2.3 LABELS A. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Write-on, 3-mil-thick, vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. emedco. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 53 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 b. LEM Products Inc. c. Seton Identification Products. 2. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. 3. Marker for Labels: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.4 TAGS A. Write-on Tags: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. LEM Products Inc. b. Seton Identification Products. 2. Polyester Tags: 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment. 3. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.5 SIGNS A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. emedco. b. Marking Services, Inc. 2. Engraved legend. 3. Thickness: a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with white letters on a dark gray background. d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Use stainless steel machine screws for installation of engraved signs. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 53 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items. G. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product. H. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway. I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. J. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer or load shedding. K. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. L. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "EMERGENCY POWER." 2. "POWER." 3. "FIRE ALARM" M. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 53 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 N. Write-on Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using UV-stabilized, plenum-rated cable ties. O. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch- high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches high. 3. Provide laminated nameplates for all new panelboards and any / all electrical equipment, junction boxes. Stick-on tags will not be accepted. 4. Provide self-adhesive, types name tags with circuit designation on cover plates of all receptacles, outlets, etc. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices. B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation. C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. D. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "EMERGENCY POWER." 2. "POWER." 3. "FIRE." E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive wraparound labels to identify the phase. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. F. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive wraparound labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl tape that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS; SECTION 26 05 53 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs. 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power-transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. I. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels. J. Operating Instruction Signs: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs. K. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs. L. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign. END OF SECTION 260553 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES; SECTION 260923 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Time switches. 2. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show installation details for the following: a. Occupancy sensors. b. Vacancy sensors. 2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and elevations, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. B. Field quality-control reports. C. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. B. Software and firmware operational documentation. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES; SECTION 260923 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TIME SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Invensys Controls. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3. TE Connectivity Ltd. B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Contact Configuration: DPST. 3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac. 4. Programs: 8 channels; each channel is individually programmable with two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week. 5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on selected channels. 6. Astronomic Time: All channels. 7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock. 2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 3. Philips Lighting Controls. 4. Square D. B. General Requirements for Sensors: 1. Wall or Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 2. Dual technology. 3. Integrated power pack. 4. Hardwired connection to switch and BAS and lighting control system. 5. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 6. Operation: a. Combination Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, sensor shall be programmed to turn lights on when coverage area is occupied and turn them off when unoccupied, WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES; SECTION 260923 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 or to turn off lights that have been manually turned on; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 7. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A and or Sensor is powered from the power pack. 8. Power: Line voltage. 9. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 10. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 11. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. 12. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 13. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn lights off when selected lighting level is present. C. Dual-Technology Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180- degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 1000 square feet when mounted48 inches above finished floor. 2.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES; SECTION 260923 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 C. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies. D. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure- borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch (13 mm). B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. E. Exterior lighting controls; provide a photocell on fixtures where indicated. Exterior lighting controls shall turn ON with a photocell and OFF via the timeswitch. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES; SECTION 260923 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations. 2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations. 3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool. 3.6 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years. B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software. 1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. END OF SECTION 260923 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES; SECTION 260923 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PANELBOARDS; SECTION 26 24 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. B. SPD: Surge protective device. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. 9. For new panelboards; match existing manufacturer and model where practicable. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PANELBOARDS; SECTION 26 24 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Enclosures: Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Height: 84 inches maximum. 3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware. 4. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware. E. Incoming Mains Location: Convertible between top and bottom. F. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. G. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PANELBOARDS; SECTION 26 24 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 H. NRTL Label: Panelboards shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards shall have meter enclosures, wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company for exact requirements. I. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. J. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include label or manual with size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices listed and labeled by an NRTL for series-connected short-circuit rating. K. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." B. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 1. 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. 2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads. b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PANELBOARDS; SECTION 26 24 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 a. RMS sensing. b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip. c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays. d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data. e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and magnitude of fault that caused the trip. f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer. g. Field-Adjustable Settings: 1) Instantaneous trip. 2) Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3) Long and short time adjustments. 4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response. 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single- pole configuration. 8. Sub-feed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door. B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating. C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover. Directories shall be typed. Existing panelboards affected by this renovation shall include updated typed directories. 2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PANELBOARDS; SECTION 26 24 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars. G. Install filler plates in unused spaces. H. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. J. Provide Phase (3), neutral and ground wires to any / all new panelboards. Wiring shall be copper; unless otherwise noted. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PANELBOARDS; SECTION 26 24 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air circuit breakers stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results, with comparisons of the two scans. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 262416 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WIRING DEVICES; SECTION 26 27 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 7 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Wall-box motion sensors. 3. Snap switches. 4. Communications outlets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations of Manufacturers' Names: 1. Cooper: Copper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell: Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Devices-Kellems. 3. Leviton: Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. 4. Pass & Seymour: Pass& Seymour/Legrand. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WIRING DEVICES; SECTION 26 27 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. D. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment: 1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. F. New receptacles installed in Guest rooms shall be arc-fault; tamper resistant type per NEC requirements. G. All new receptacles installed in toilet areas and / or within 6LF of a sink shall be GFCI-type. Coordinate in field prior to rough-ins. 2.2 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5352 (duplex). 2.3 USB CHARGER DEVICES A. Tamper-Resistant, USB Charger Receptacles: 12 V, 2.0 A, USB Type A; Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 1310, and FS W- C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; TR7746 (USB Charger Receptacle). b. Hubbell; USB15x2W (USB Charger Receptacle). c. Leviton; T5632 (USB Charger Receptacle). d. Pass & Seymour; TM8USBWCC6 (USB Charger Receptacle). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WIRING DEVICES; SECTION 26 27 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 7 2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel- plated, brass mounting strap. 3. USB Receptacles: Dual Type A. 4. Line Voltage Receptacles: Dual, two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. 125 V, 20 A, straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; GF20. (GFCI Receptacle). b. Hubbell; GF5362 (GFCI Receptacle). c. Pass & Seymour; 2084. (GFCI Receptacle). 2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way). 2.6 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, DUAL TECHNOLOGY 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: a. Cooper b. Hubbell c. Pass & Seymour d. Watt Stopper B. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting-control sensor and conventional switch lighting-control unit using dual technology. 1. Connections: Provisions for connection to BAS. 2. Connections: Hard wired. 3. Connections: Wireless. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WIRING DEVICES; SECTION 26 27 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 7 4. Rated 960 W at 120-V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120-V ac or 10 A at 277-V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120-V ac. 5. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 6. Adjustable time delay of 20 minutes. 7. Able to be locked to Manual-On mode. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc. 9. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. 2.7 RESIDENTIAL DEVICES A. Telephone Outlet: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart) b. Leviton Manufacturing Co. Inc. 2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating Category 5e, twisted pair cable complying with Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling." Comply with UL 1863. Coordinate exact cable requirements with the Owner prior to any rough-in. B. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart) b. Leviton Manufacturing Co. Inc. 2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating Category 5e, twisted pair cable complying with Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" and a single BNC connector for terminating coaxial cable complying with Section 271533 "Communications Coaxial Horizontal Cabling." Coordinate exact cable requirements with the Owner prior to any rough-in. 3. Comply with UL 1863. 2.8 WALL-BOX DIMMERS A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472. C. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. Coordinate any new lighting controls / dimming with the associated light fixture type and associated light source for compatibility. All lighting controls / switches serving the Public Spaces, shall be located out of the public way and located in back-of-house areas. Coordinate location(s) prior to rough-ins. 2.9 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WIRING DEVICES; SECTION 26 27 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 7 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather- resistant , thermoplastic with lockable cover. 2.10 FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. SPD Devices: Blue. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color and include a self-adhesive typed label with panel and circuit designation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WIRING DEVICES; SECTION 26 27 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 7 D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi- gang wall plates. I. GFCI Receptacles: Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. B. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: a. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. b. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. c. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. d. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 WIRING DEVICES; SECTION 26 27 26 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 7 of 7 e. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. f. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 262726 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FUSES; SECTION 26 28 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 2 SECTION 262813 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following: a. Control circuits. b. Panelboards. c. Switchboards. d. Enclosed controllers. e. Enclosed switches. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussmann, an Eaton business 2. Edison; a brand of Bussmann by Eaton 3. Littelfuse, Inc 4. Mersen USA 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. 1. Type RK-1: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 2. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC, fast acting. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FUSES; SECTION 26 28 13 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 2 B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse. B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in location shown on the Drawings or as indicated in the field by Owner. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder. END OF SECTION 262813 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS; SECTION 26 28 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 7 SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers 4. Enclosures. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF format. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS; SECTION 26 28 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 7 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 2.3 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS; SECTION 26 28 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 7 1. Single throw. 2. Three pole. 3. 240-V ac. 4. 200 A and smaller. 5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses. 6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.4 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.5 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS; SECTION 26 28 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 7 B. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material. Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area. C. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. D. Standards: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. E. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2.6 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1). C. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be externally operable with the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover. The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the following environmental ratings. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS; SECTION 26 28 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 7 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. B. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. C. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. F. Install fuses in fusible devices. G. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Perform tests and inspections. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. c. Verify that the unit is clean. d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings. f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods: 1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS; SECTION 26 28 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 7 a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12. h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. i. Verify correct phase barrier installation. j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding surfaces. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data. d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent. e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection Systems, Low-Voltage." E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested and describe test results. 3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 262816 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 8 SECTION 265116 - FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior fluorescent luminaires, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Luminaire supports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating E. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, arranged by designation. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 8 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. B. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled luminaires, from manufacturer. C. Sample warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598. E. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac. F. Recessed Luminaires: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2.2 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. THD Rating: Less than 10 percent. 6. Surge Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 8 7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. B. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. C. Single Ballasts for Multiple Luminaires: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field. D. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Luminaires: Electronic type. 1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Sound Rating: Class A. 3. THD Rating: Less than 20 percent. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 5. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 6. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on EMI and RFI for non-consumer equipment. 2.4 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens (minimum) each. Connect un switched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast. 2. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 3. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.5 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32-W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3000 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate lamp color temperature with Lighting Fixture schedule and notes on Contract Documents. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 8 B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Four-pin, CRI of 80 (minimum), color temperature of 3000 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours of operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated. 1. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 2.6 DOWNLIGHT A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: 1. Advanced Lighting Technologies 2. GE Lighting Solutions 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 5. Philips Lighting Company 6. Technical Consumer Products B. Universal mounting bracket. C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. 2.7 RECESSED LINEAR A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: 1. Advanced Lighting Technologies 2. GE Lighting Solutions 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 5. Philips Lighting Company 6. Technical Consumer Products B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. 2.8 STRIP LIGHT A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: 1. Advanced Lighting Technologies 2. GE Lighting Solutions 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 5. Philips Lighting Company 6. Technical Consumer Products B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. 2.9 SUSPENDED, NONLINEAR A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: 1. Advanced Lighting Technologies 2. GE Lighting Solutions WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 8 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 5. Philips Lighting Company 6. Technical Consumer Products B. Universal mounting bracket. C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. 2.10 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position. C. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic with Clear polycarbonate. 2. Acrylic: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. D. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Powder-coat finish. 2.11 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.12 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and luminaire shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire. C. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. D. Install lamps in each luminaire. E. Supports: Sized and rated for luminaire weight. F. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface. G. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls or Attached using through bolts and backing plates on either side of wall. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. H. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. I. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 7 of 8 C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 265116 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 FLUORESCENT INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 16 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 8 of 8 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 6 SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires: 1. Downlight. 2. Recessed linear. 3. Strip light. 4. Suspended, nonlinear. 5. Materials. 6. Finishes. 7. Luminaire support. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, arranged by designation. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 6 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Reference Lighting Fixture schedule on Contract Documents. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire. C. Sample warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. California Title 24 compliant. 3. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. 4. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. 5. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 6. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4. C. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K. D. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. E. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 6 F. Internal driver. G. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac. 1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. H. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Powder-coat finish. 2.2 DOWNLIGHT A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: 1. Architectural Lighting Works. 2. Axis Lighting, Inc. 3. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business. 4. Elite Lighting Corporation. 5. Finelite. 6. GE Lighting Solutions. B. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc Minimum 3,000 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lumens per watt. C. Universal mounting bracket. D. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. E. Optics: 1. Adjustable lens. 2. Spot light distribution. 2.3 RECESSED LINEAR Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: 1. Architectural Lighting Works. 2. Axis Lighting, Inc. 3. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business. 4. Elite Lighting Corporation. 5. Finelite. 6. GE Lighting Solutions. 7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. B. Minimum 3,000 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lumens per watt. C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 6 2.4 STRIP LIGHT A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: 1. Architectural Lighting Works. 2. Finelite. 3. GE Lighting Solutions. 4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. B. Minimum 2,000 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 75 lumens per watt. C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. 2.5 SUSPENDED, NONLINEAR A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: 1. Architectural Lighting Works. 2. Axis Lighting, Inc. 3. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business. 4. Elite Lighting Corporation. 5. Finelite. 6. GE Lighting Solutions. 7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. B. Minimum 3,000 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lumens per watt. C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position. C. Diffusers, and Globes: 1. Tempered Fresnel glass or Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic with Clear polycarbonate 2. Acrylic: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. D. Housings: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 6 1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Powder-coat finish. 2.7 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Supports: Sized and rated for luminaire weight. E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: Secured to outlet box. F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls or Attached using through bolts and backing plates on either side of wall. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. G. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 51 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 6 I. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 265119 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 56 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 8 SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp technology. 2. Luminaire supports. 3. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color rendering index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 56 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 8 C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For luminaire supports. 1. Include design calculations for luminaire supports and seismic restraints. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale and coordinated. B. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of the following: 1. Luminaire. 2. Photoelectric relay. D. Sample warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Architect prior to the start of luminaire installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 56 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 8 E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. F. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K. G. L70 lamp life of 50,000 hours. H. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. I. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac. J. In-line Fusing: On the primary for each luminaire. K. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use and in enclosed locations. L. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer. M. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 2.2 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Area and Site: 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: a. Architectural Lighting Works. b. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business. c. GE Lighting Solutions. d. Kim Lighting e. Sternberg Lighting 2. Luminaire Shape: As Indicated on the Drawings 3. Mounting: Pole with extruded-aluminum round arm, 11 inches in length. 4. Luminaire-Mounting Height: 20’-0” height of luminaire from finished grade. 5. Distribution: Type V. B. Canopy: 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: a. Architectural Lighting Works. b. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business. c. GE Lighting Solutions. d. Kim Lighting e. Sternberg Lighting 2. Luminaire Shape: As Indicated on the Drawings 3. Dimensions: As Indicated on the Drawings. C. Decorative Post Top: 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as listed on the drawings or equal by one of the following: a. Architectural Lighting Works. b. Kim Lighting c. Sternberg Lighting 2. Luminaire-Mounting Height: 12’-0” height of luminaire from finished grade. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 56 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 8 3. Mounting Type: Arm. 4. Distribution: Type V. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. D. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. G. Housings: 1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. 2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. 2.4 FINISHES A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. C. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 56 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 8 2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20 requirements; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax. D. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Fasten luminaire to structural support. E. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and re-lamping. 3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls or Attached using through bolts and backing plates on either side of wall. G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables. H. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated. I. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 56 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 8 J. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation. K. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and wiring methods. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTED LUMINAIRES A. Aim as indicated on Drawings. B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls. C. Illumination Tests: 1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IES testing guide(s): a. IES LM-64. 2. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. D. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 56 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 7 of 8 E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaires and photocell relays. END OF SECTION 265619 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING; SECTION 26 56 19 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 8 of 8 DIVISION 26 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 1 of 14 SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Magnetic door holders. 7. Remote annunciator. 8. Addressable interface device. 9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for cables and conductors for fire-alarm systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. 1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring. 4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 2 of 14 a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams. C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level IV minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances. 3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 3 of 14 c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. d. Riser diagram. e. Record copy of site-specific software. f. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following: 1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals. g. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. h. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each annunciator unit. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician. C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory). D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 4 of 14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system. B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation. C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors. D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Carbon monoxide detectors. 6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 7. Fire-extinguishing system operation. 8. Fire standpipe system. 9. Dry system pressure flow switch. B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 7. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 8. Activate preaction system. 9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 10. Activate elevator power shunt trip. 11. Activate emergency lighting control. 12. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 13. Record events in the system memory. C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. High- or low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system. 3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision. 4. Loss of communication with any panel on the network. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 5 of 14 D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, or remote annunciator. 4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Break in standby battery circuitry. 8. Failure of battery charging. 9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. E. System Supervisory Signal Actions: 1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company. 2. Gamewell - FCI by Honeywell. 3. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 4. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 5. SimplexGrinnell LP. B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: 1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864. 2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone. 3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service. C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 6 of 14 supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. D. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits: 1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B. 2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1. E. Notification-Appliance Circuit: 1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow. 3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72. F. Elevator Recall: 1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm-initiating devices: a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway. 2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated. 3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay. a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor. G. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke-barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system. H. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity- adjustment schedule changes in system memory. I. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. J. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by 24-V dc source. 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power- supply module rating. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 7 of 14 K. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company. 2. Gamewell - FCI by Honeywell. 3. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 4. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 5. SimplexGrinnell LP. B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. 1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company. 2. Gamewell - FCI by Honeywell. 3. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 4. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 5. SimplexGrinnell LP. B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be four wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power- on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F (8 or 11 deg C) per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat- detection units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F (57 or 68 deg C). c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 8 of 14 d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day. C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). 2.7 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell. 3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts. 4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or internal faults. 5. Comply with UL 2075. 6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system. 8. Test button simulates an alarm condition. 2.8 HEAT DETECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company. 2. Gamewell - FCI by Honeywell. 3. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 4. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 5. SimplexGrinnell LP. B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. 1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device. C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature or a rate of rise. 1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 9 of 14 2.9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 2. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 3. SimplexGrinnell LP. B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. C. Chimes: Vibrating type. D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. E. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens. 1. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 4. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white. 2.10 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate. 1. Electromagnets: Require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf (111-N) holding force. 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc. 4. Rating: 120-V ac. B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware. 2.11 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 1. Mounting: Surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1. B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 10 of 14 2.12 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. General: 1. Include address-setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers. B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall or to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown. 1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field wiring. D. Control Module: 1. Operate notification devices. 2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service. 2.13 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632. B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire- alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal. C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following: 1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit. D. Digital data transmission shall include the following: 1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply. 5. Loss of power. 6. Low battery. 7. Abnormal test signal. 8. Communication bus failure. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 11 of 14 E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches (1980 mm) above the finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." E. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: 1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches (1520 mm) of the exit doorway. 2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches (1060 mm) and 48 inches (1220 mm) above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated. F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: Comply with NFPA 72. G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches (9100 mm) long shall be supported at both ends. H. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location. Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator shafts. I. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound. J. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 12 of 14 K. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. L. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated. M. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. 3.2 PATHWAYS A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed. 1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches (2440 mm) above the floor shall be installed in EMT. B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT. C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. 1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before making connections. B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches (910 mm) from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems. 2. Magnetically held-open doors. 3. Electronically locked doors and access gates. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control. 6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. 9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker. 10. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 13 of 14 3.5 GROUNDING A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter. b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. F. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.7 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Comply with UL 864. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM; SECTION 28 31 11 Copyright 2016 © Baskervill Page 14 of 14 B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years. C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software. 1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. END OF SECTION 283111 DIVISION 31 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill TERMITE CONTROL; SECTION 31 31 16 PAGE 1 of 6 SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment. 2. Wood treatment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood preservative treatment by pressure process. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and profiles for termite control products. 2. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of termite control product. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. D. Wood Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the following: 1. Date and time of application. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill TERMITE CONTROL; SECTION 31 31 16 PAGE 2 of 6 2. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 3. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 4. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 5. Areas of application. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is accredited by manufacturer. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Soil Treatment: 1. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Related Work: Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites, including Formosan termites (Coptotermes formosanus). If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Wood Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied wood termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites, including Formosan termites (Coptotermes formosanus). If subterranean termite damage is discovered during warranty period, repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation and treat replacement wood. 1. Warranty Period: 12 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single manufacturer. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill TERMITE CONTROL; SECTION 31 31 16 PAGE 3 of 6 2.2 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. 1. Manufacturers: a. Bayer Environmental Science b. Ensystex, Inc. c. Syngenta 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. 2.3 WOOD TREATMENT A. Borate: EPA-Registered borate termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution for spray application and a gel solution for pressure injection, formulated to prevent termite infestation in wood. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ensystex, Inc b. Nisus Corporation c. NovaGuard Technologies, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare work areas according to the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and according to manufacturer's written instructions before beginning application and installation of termite control treatment(s). Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill TERMITE CONTROL; SECTION 31 31 16 PAGE 4 of 6 3.3 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA-Registered Label volume and rate for maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. 3. Masonry: Treat voids. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and below-grade walls will be penetrated. B. Post warning signs in areas of application. C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 3.4 APPLYING WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Treatment: Apply wood treatment after framing, sheathing, and exterior weather protection is completed but before electrical and mechanical systems are installed. B. Application: Mix borate wood treatment solution to a uniform consistency. Apply treatment at the product's EPA-Registered Label volume and rate for the maximum borate concentration allowed for each specific use so that wood framing, sheathing, siding, and structural members subject to infestation receive treatment. Apply treatment to the height of 8 feet (244 mm) above grade. 1. Framing and Sheathing: Apply termiticide solution by spray to bare wood and with complete coverage. 2. Exterior Uncoated Wood Trim and Siding: Apply termiticide solution to bare wood only when forecasted weather conditions indicate no precipitation or fog before application of seal coat. After 48 hours, verify that surface is sufficiently dry for seal coat and apply seal coat of paint as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. B. Protect termiticide solution dispersed in treated soils and fills from being diluted by exposure to water spillage or weather until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include quarterly maintenance as required for proper performance according to the product's EPA- WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill TERMITE CONTROL; SECTION 31 31 16 PAGE 5 of 6 Registered Label and manufacturer's written instructions. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide from termite-control-treatment Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. 1. Include annual inspection for termite activity and effectiveness of termite treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 313116 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill TERMITE CONTROL; SECTION 31 31 16 PAGE 6 of 6 DIVISION 32 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT SLURRY SEAL; SECTION 32 12 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 321216.13 - EMULSIFIED ASPHALT SLURRY SEAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This work includes placing slurry seal. Emulsified asphalt slurry seal is a thin application of a mixture of fine non-plastic aggregate, emulsified asphalt, mineral filler, and water. The work described in this specification consists of furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services and performing all work required to (1) apply a sealcoat to public parking drives and lots on the Project Site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 2. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Material Test Reports: For each paving material, by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of SS427 Emulsified Asphalt Slurry Seal of GA DOT for asphalt sealing work. 1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT SLURRY SEAL; SECTION 32 12 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: 1. Ensure that the aggregate used in emulsified asphalt slurry seal meets the requirements of Subsection GA DOT 802.2.01 . Except, use aggregate manufactured from Group II, Class A or B crushed stone or slag with a sand equivalent value of at least 50 2. Ensure that the aggregates shipped to the project are uniform and do not require blending or premixing at the storage area before use. B. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242/D 242M or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or ASTM D-2939 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or AASHTO T 59 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. C. Water: Potable. 2.3 MIXES A. Emulsified Asphalt Sealcoat. The sealcoat shall consist of a mixture of emulsified asphalt, mineral aggregate, additives and water properly proportioned, mixed and uniformly spread over the surfaces areas to be treated. The mixture shall contain no asbestos. The cured sealcoat shall have a homogeneous appearance, adhere firmly to the surface and provide a skid resistant texture. The sealcoat product shall meet ASTM D-2939 standards or equivalent. 1. Asphalt emulsion approved manufacturers or equal a. Neyra Industries, Inc. Paveshield/ Tarconite b. Sealmaster, (PMM) Polymer-Modified Masterseal AE/CT c. Vance Brothers, Unltraseal/ProtecTar Coal Tar Emulsion d. Equals must be pre-approved by the Facility Manager or Construction Manager prior to application 2. Surface to receive sealcoat must be free of all foreign material and dry immediately prior to application of sealer WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT SLURRY SEAL; SECTION 32 12 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 3. Oil – Grease spots should be treated with one of the following a. Neyra Oil Seal b. Sealmaster Petro Seal, c. Or equal 4. Cleaning by air blowing, vacuum, mechanical sweeper, techniques approved by customer 5. Cracks in excess of 1/4”, but less than one inch in width must be sealed prior to application. B. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D-2939, Type 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Placing the sealcoat. B. Mixing and spreading equipment shall conform to manufacturer’s requirements. 1. Mixes are in the range of 100 gallons of emulsified asphalt sealer, 20 gallons of water, 2 gallons of additive and 300-500 pounds of sand (Portland cement or fly ash may be substituted depending on manufacturer’s requirements). 2. When properly mixed with water, additive and aggregate, and applied, one gallon of emulsified asphalt sealant will cover 11-13 square yards in one coat of application. C. All work shall be performed only when the surface and ambient air temperatures is at least 50 degrees F and rising. 1. Surface temperature should not drop below 50 degrees in a 24-hour period following application. D. The mix shall be spread in a manner to fill cracks and achieve a uniform skid-resistant surface. 3.2 PATCHING A. Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces abutting the patch. Apply at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m). 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. B. Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.10 to 0.30 gal./sq. yd. per inch depth (0.5 to 1.40 L/sq. m per 25 mm depth). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT SLURRY SEAL; SECTION 32 12 16 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated. 2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving. 3.4 SURFACE TREATMENTS A. Equipment: A mixing machine equipped with a fines feeder, mixer, water pressure system and fog type sprayer and the ability to control the application rate is recommended. 1. The sealcoat application shall be applied by either pressurized spray application equipment or self-propelled squeegee equipment. 2. Pressurized spray equipment shall be capable of spraying pavement sealer with sand (or other mineral aggregate) added. 3. Equipment shall have continuous agitation or mixing capabilities to maintain a homogeneous consistency throughout the application process. B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow curing. 1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface. C. Pavement Markings. Refer to section, 32 17 23, “Pavement Markings”. END OF SECTION 321216 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 1 of 12 SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Concrete Paving. Including the Following: 1. Driveways. 2. Parking lots. 3. Curbs and gutters. 4. Walks. 5. Stamped Detectable Warning Materials B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Ready-mix concrete manufacturer and testing agency. B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 2 of 12 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers. C. Material Test Reports: For each of the following: 1. Aggregates: Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stamped Detectable Warning Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of stamped concrete paving systems. B. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready- mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist"). C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. B. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following: 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures. C. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows when hot- weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 3 of 12 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet (30.5 m) or less. B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, fabricated from galvanized- steel wire into flat sheets. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed. C. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars. D. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars. E. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars; assembled with clips. F. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M. G. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M. H. Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A; coated, deformed. I. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. J. Epoxy-Coated, Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) plain-steel bars. K. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 4 of 12 L. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement. M. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, white portland cement Type I/II. 2. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 1N, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. E. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry. B. Water: Potable. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or in preformed strips. B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. 2.7 STAMPED DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS A. Detectable Warning Stamp: Semirigid polyurethane mats with formed underside capable of imprinting detectable warning pattern on plastic concrete; perforated with a vent hole at each dome. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 5 of 12 1. Manufacturers: a. Advanced Surfaces Inc. b. Stampcrete International, Ltd c. Transpo Industries, Inc. 2. Size of Stamp: One piece, 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm). B. Liquid Release Agent: Manufacturer's standard, clear, evaporating formulation designed to facilitate release of stamp mats. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advanced Surfaces Inc. b. Scofield, L. M. Company c. Stampcrete International, Ltd 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method. 2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that comply with or exceed requirements. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Slag Cement: 50 percent. C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. E. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: [0.45] [0.50]. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 6 of 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes). 3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded-wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 7 of 12 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet (15.25 m) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. a. Tolerance: Ensure that sawed joints are within 3 inches (75 mm) either way from centers of dowels. E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, and items to be embedded or cast-in. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 8 of 12 C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies[, reinforcement,] or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement dowels and joint devices. H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off. I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing. K. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing. 1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture. 3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES A. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 9 of 12 1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. (12 kg/10 sq. m) of dampened, slip-resistive aggregate over paving surface in two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. 2. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel-wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate. 3.9 DETECTABLE WARNING INSTALLATION A. Blockouts: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of detectable paving units specified in Section 321726 "Tactile Warning Surfacing." 1. Tolerance for Opening Size: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. B. Stamped Detectable Warnings: Install stamped detectable warnings as part of a continuous concrete paving placement and according to stamp-mat manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Before using stamp mats, verify that the vent holes are unobstructed. 2. Apply liquid release agent to the concrete surface and the stamp mat. 3. Stamping: While initially finished concrete is plastic, accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence. Uniformly load, gently vibrate, and press mats into concrete to produce imprint pattern on concrete surface. Load and tamp mats directly perpendicular to the stamp-mat surface to prevent distortion in shape of domes. Press and tamp until mortar begins to come through all of the vent holes. Gently remove stamp mats. 4. Trimming: After 24 hours, cut off the tips of mortar formed by the vent holes. 5. Remove residual release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions, but no fewer than three days after stamping concrete. High-pressure-wash surface and joint patterns, taking care not to damage stamped concrete. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff. 3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 10 of 12 c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 3.11 PAVING TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 (ACI 117M) and as follows: 1. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet- (3-m-) long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm). 4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12 inches (13 mm per 300 mm) of tie bar. 5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when it is 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 11 of 12 compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. I. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.13 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 321313 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill CONCRETE PAVING; SECTION 32 13 13 PAGE 12 of 12 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PAVEMENT MARKINGS; SECTION 32 17 23 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 1 of 4 SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes painted markings applied to asphalt and concrete pavement. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for painting exterior concrete surfaces other than pavement. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to marking pavement including, but not limited to, the following: a. Pavement aging period before application of pavement markings. b. Review requirements for protecting pavement markings, including restriction of traffic during installation period. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Shop Drawings: For pavement markings. 1. Indicate pavement markings, colors, lane separations, defined parking spaces, and dimensions to adjacent work. 2. Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified; on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of GDOT Standards for pavement-marking work. WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PAVEMENT MARKINGS; SECTION 32 17 23 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 2 of 4 1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for alkyd materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers 1. Florida Transcor 2. Trantex Transportation Products of Texas Inc. 2.2 PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT A. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1 made of 100 percent recycled glass. 1. Roundness: Minimum 80 percent true spheres by weight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly secured to pavement. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application beyond the stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath the stencil. 2. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L). WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PAVEMENT MARKINGS; SECTION 32 17 23 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 3 of 4 3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 321723 WIDEWATERS; DOUBLETREE BY HILTON; CONVERSION 25 AUG 2016 2211 N FRONTAGE RD., VAIL CO, 81657 CD PACKAGE BASKERVILL PROJECT NO 2.160036.0 PAVEMENT MARKINGS; SECTION 32 17 23 Copyright 2016 © 2016 Baskervill PAGE 4 of 4 B16-0266 Guestrooms and Public Spaces 2211 N. Frontage Road DoubleTree Conversion List of Changes – ASI-01 Attachment Incorporate ASI-01 in Construction Documents. ASI-01 includes addition of fixtures, finishes, Equipment and subsequent updates to MEP Drawings required. Additions include: · Modified demolition scope for found existing items · Indication of final furniture · Indications of final finishes · Placement of accent lighting · Additional finishes detailing · Additional door detailing · Additional casework sections and details · Toilet Accessory updates · Guestroom furniture updates · Guestroom finish updates · Scope for all Guestroom types (2 missing loft units) · Revised Plumbing fixture schedule · Revise Light Fixture Schedule · Revised Mechanical schedules